Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3325 Series Service Manual Download

Page: 741 / 951

8-190

Service Mode > COPIER > OPTION > ACC

COPIER>OPTION>USER

SJ-CLMSK

ON/OFF secured job stop button display

Lv.2 Details

To set whether to display the button to stop a secured job.

When 0 is set, the stop button is displayed.

When COIN is set to 6 or 7 (charge mode: Type-C), set 1. Since the

stop button is not displayed, the secured job cannot be stopped.

Use case

When prohibiting to stop the secured job in charge mode Type-C

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

0 to 1

0: OFF (Display), 1: ON (Hide)

Default value

Related service mode COPIER> OPTION> ACC> COIN

PRTDP-SW

Set delivery side for 1-page job:2-sided

Lv.1 Details

To set whether to deliver paper face-up or face-down when printing

only 1 page although 2-sided print is set.

When 0 is set, paper is delivered face-down like 1-sided job. (Paper

does not pass through the Duplex Path.)

When 1 is set, paper is delivered face-up via the Duplex Path. Paper

feed distance becomes longer so productivity is decreased.

Use case

When changing the delivery side of 1-page print although 2-sided print

is set

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

0 to 1

0: Face-down delivery, 1: Face-up delivery

Default value

PDFD-MSW

Set output paper size: direct print PDF

Lv.2 Details

To set output paper size at direct print PDF.

Usually, the region defined by MediaBox is output. However, in some

cases, the region defined (trimmed) by CropBox is judged as output

paper size depending on PDF file.

Set 1 when output result differs from what is defined at direct print

PDF.

Use case

When preferring to output a PDF file with paper which size is defined

by CropBox while rectangle sizes defined by MediaBox and CropBox

are different

(e.g.: when preferring to output a PDF file with A4 size paper while A3

and A4 are defined by MediaBox and CropBox respectively, etc.)

Adj/set/operate method Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.
Display/adj/set range

0 to 1

0: MediaBox (Normal), 1: CropBox

Default value

COPIER>OPTION>USER

SFT-OUT

Setting of offset priority delivery

Lv.2 Details

To set whether to deliver a job where offset and collate/offset group is

set to the delivery destination with offset function.

When 1 is set, a job is delivered to the delivery destination with offset

function even though a delivery destination without offset function is

set in Settings/Registration menu.

Use case

When preferring to deliver a job to the delivery destination with offset

function

Adj/set/operate method 1) Enter the setting value, and then press OK key.

2) Turn OFF/ON the main power switch.

Display/adj/set range

0 to 1

0: Based on Output Tray Settings, 1: Priority on job settings (deliver to

a delivery destination where offset is possible)

Default value

Related user mode

Function Settings> Common> Paper Output Settings> Output Tray

Settings

FMTMH2M

[For customization]

T-8-57

Summary of Contents for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3325 Series

Page 1: ...ageRUNNER ADVANCE C3330 C3325 C3320 Series Service Manual Rev 3 0 Product Overview Technical Explanation Periodical Service Disassembly Assembly Adjustment Troubleshooting Error Jam Alarm Service Mode Installation Appendix ...

Page 2: ...mation as the need arises In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period Canon will issue a new edition of this manual The following paragraph does not apply to any countries where such provisions are inconsistent with local law Trademarks The product names and company names used in this manual are the registered trademarks of the individual companies Copy...

Page 3: ...ion of the electric signal The expression turn on the power means flipping on the power switch closing the front door and closing the delivery unit door which results in supplying the machine with power 2 In the digital circuits 1 is used to indicate that the voltage level of a given signal is High while 0 is used to indicate Low The voltage value however differs from circuit to circuit In additio...

Page 4: ...ivity 1 11 Paper type 1 12 Parts Name 1 21 Cross Sectional View 1 21 Control Panel 1 21 Contents 2 Technical Explanation Basic Configuration 2 2 Functional Configuration 2 2 Document Exposure 2 3 Overview 2 3 Controls 2 6 Main Controller 2 10 Overview 2 10 Boot Sequence 2 11 Shutdown Sequence 2 11 Controls 2 12 Security 2 14 Security Function Encryption Key Certificate and Protection of Password 2...

Page 5: ...ing Parts 3 3 4 Disassembly Assembly Preface 4 2 Outline 4 2 Points to Note when Tightening a Screw 4 2 Parts replacement procedures list 4 3 List of Parts 4 4 External Cover 4 4 Motor 4 7 Fan 4 7 Clutch 4 8 Solenoid 4 8 Heater 4 9 Sensor 4 9 Switch 4 10 PCB 4 11 List of Connectors 4 12 External Cover Interior System 4 27 Fully open the Right Door 4 27 Removing the Front Door 4 28 Removing the Fro...

Page 6: ...up Feed System 4 85 Removing the Pickup Feed Separation Roller Cassette 1 2 Cassette 3 4 Option 4 85 Removing the Multi purpose Tray Feed Separation Roller 4 86 Removing the Right Door Unit 4 87 Removing the First Delivery Unit 4 90 Removing the Second Delivery Unit 4 91 Removing the Third Delivery Unit 4 92 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit 4 92 Removing the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit 4 94 Removing...

Page 7: ...age Device 6 51 Version Upgrade via CDS 6 57 Error Code List 6 77 Backup Restore 6 84 Overview 6 84 Backup by main power OFF 6 84 Backup Restoration using SST 6 85 Backup Restoration Using a USB Device 6 88 Formatting the Hard Disk with SST 6 90 Formatting FLASH PCB or Hard Disk by Download Mode 6 91 7 Error Jam Alarm Overview 7 2 Outline 7 2 Error Code 7 5 Error Code Details 7 5 Jam Code 7 107 Ja...

Page 8: ...en Turning OFF the Main Power 9 33 Installation Outline Drawing 9 33 Installation Procedure 9 33 Inner 2way Tray J1 9 36 Points to Note at Installation 9 36 Checking the contents 9 36 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power 9 36 Installation Outline Drawing 9 36 Installation procedure 9 37 Checking after Installation 9 39 Copy Tray J2 9 40 Points to Note at Installation 9 40 Check Items when T...

Page 9: ...ecking the Contents 9 103 Remove the covers 9 103 Installation Procedure 9 104 Installing the Covers 9 106 Combination of HDD Options 9 108 Points to Note Regarding Data Backup Export 9 108 Making a Backup of the Data reference only 9 110 TYPE 1 HDD Data Encryption Kit Installation Procedure 9 113 Points to Note at Installation 9 113 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Kit 9 113 Chec...

Page 10: ... Mark 9 145 Informing the System Administrator That Installation Is Complete 9 145 Executing auto gradation adjustment 9 146 Execution of the minimum installation work 9 146 Appendix Service Tools II Special Tools II Solvents and Oils III General Circuit Diagram IV Backup Data V Detail of HDD partition IX Soft counter specifications XI Soft counter specifications XI Removal XVI Removal XVI ...

Page 11: ...andling of Laser System Turn Power Switch ON Power Supply Safety of Toner Notes When Handling a Lithium Battery Notes Before it Works Serving Points to Note at Cleaning Notes On Assembly Disassembly Safety Precautions ...

Page 12: ...eans of a warning label Figure If you must open the cover and defeat interlock switches be sure not to enter the laser beam into an eye during the work The following warnings are given to comply with Safety Principles EN60950 1 Diese Maschine ist der Klasse 1 der Laserprodukte zugeordnet Innerhalb der Maschine wird jedoch ein Laserstrahl der Klasse 3B ausgestrahlt und es ist gefährlich wenn dieser...

Page 13: ...ne for local rated voltage and over untie the cord binding and insert the power plug completely into the extension cord outlet to ensure a firm connection between the power cord and the extension cord 2 The socket outlet shall be installed near the equipment and shall be easily accessible Safety of Toner About Toner The machine s toner is a non toxic material made of plastic iron and small amounts...

Page 14: ... as alcohol be sure to check that the component of solvent is vaporized completely before assembling Notes On Assembly Disassembly Follow the items below to assemble disassemble the device 1 Disconnect the power plug to avoid any potential dangers during assembling disassembling works 2 If not specially instructed reverse the order of disassembly to reinstall 3 Ensure to use the right screw type l...

Page 15: ...oo much force when tightening the screw The recommended torque value is shown below as a reference value Type of Screws RS tight W Sams Binding TP Fastened member Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Metal Resin Tightening torque N m M4 Approx 1 6 Approx 1 6 Approx 1 6 Approx 0 8 Approx 1 6 Approx 0 8 Approx 1 6 Approx 0 8 M3 Approx 0 8 Approx 0 8 Approx 0 6 Approx 0 6 Approx 0 6 Approx 0 6 Approx ...

Page 16: ...1 1 Product Overview Product Overview Product Lineup Features Specifications Parts Name ...

Page 17: ...0 Series iR ADV 4200 Series iR ADV 6200 Series iR ADV C7200 Series iR ADV C5200 Series iR ADV C2200 Series iR ADV C350 Series New Light インナー着いた構成のイラスト F 1 1 F 1 2 Host machine Product name imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3330 C3325 C3320 Underlined 2 digit numeric figures indicate print speed ppm print per minute C3330 C3325 C3320 Print Speed BW Color 30 30 ppm 25 25 ppm 20 20 ppm T 1 1 ...

Page 18: ...L1 10 FL Cassette AX1 Option cassette for Cassette 1 small size 11 FL Cassette AY1 Option cassette for Cassette 2 3 4 large size 12 Copy Tray J2 3 Way Unit D1 is required 13 Inner 2way Tray J1 3 Way Unit D1 is required Cannot be installed with Inner Finisher G1 Cannot be installed with Booklet Finisher U1 Cannot be installed with Staple Finisher U1 14 Inner Finisher G1 Cannot be installed with Inn...

Page 19: ... Voice Operation Kit C2 Cannot be installed with Utility Tray A2 9 HDD Data Encryption Kit C9 10 Document Scan Lock Kit B1 11 USB Device Port E4 12 Serial Interface Kit K2 Cannot be installed with Copy Card Reader F1 Cannot be installed with Copy Control Interface Kit A1 13 Copy Control Interface Kit A1 Cannot be installed with Copy Card Reader F1 Cannot be installed with Serial Interface Kit K2 1...

Page 20: ...pose tray Roller Longer life Improved serviceability Improved serviceability Improved usability Improved usability Improved usability Low running cost Low running cost ADF Pickup Separation Roller Easier replacement F 1 5 Characteristics Toner Container This equipment uses IAP Insulated Air Pressure toner bottles Characteristics Description Toner supply mouth Smaller diameter Toner soiling resista...

Page 21: ...ols Furthermore the following parts can be replaced by the user User replaceable consumable parts Parts number Model number Description of replacement procedure Waste Toner Container FM1 A606 WT 202 On individual package Fixing Unit FM1 A613 100V FM1 D276 120V FM1 D277 230V FX 202 On individual package ADF Maintenance Kit a set of Pickup Roller Separation Roller 4Y8 3044 DR 202 In the procedure in...

Page 22: ...ainer Staples Drum Unit 1 The item numbers of the Fixing Unit and ADF Maintenance Kit are not displayed 1 Can be displayed only in the case of COPIER OPTION USER P CRG LF 1 F 1 9 T 1 6 Package Describing the same item number also on the part s package enhances the association between the part and the host machine at the user site GENUINE DR 202 Quantity 容纳个数 Quantité 入数 1 Made in Japan Fabriqué au...

Page 23: ...set in COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DLV CL BK F 1 11 T 1 7 Setup Guide Setup Guide is designed to improve the workability during the installation by enabling to implement the series of necessary setting items at installation of a device in the format of a navigation The items that can be set are as follows Display order Setting screen Remarks 1 Switch Language Keyboard If canceled the device starts up w...

Page 24: ...ms related to installation Troubleshooting Items related to troubleshooting Parts Replacement Items performed at parts replacement Major Adjustment Major items of adjustment F 1 12 T 1 9 Limiting of Color Printing Even if an error attributed to the Developing Unit or drum of any of the Y M C colors has occurred B W printing and copying remain possible without entering the limited printer function ...

Page 25: ...4 to 75 g m2 Recycled 2 76 to 90 g m2 Recycled 3 91 to 105 g m2 Color Pre Punched Bond Heavy 1 106 to 128 g m2 Heavy 2 129 to 163 g m2 Heavy 3 164 to 220 g m2 Transparency and Envelopes Multi purpose Tray Thin 52 to 63 g m2 Plain 1 64 to 75 g m2 Plain 2 76 to 90 g m2 Plain 3 91 to 105 g m2 Recycled 1 64 to 75 g m2 Recycled 2 76 to 90 g m2 Recycled 3 91 to 105 g m2 Color Pre Punched Bond Heavy 1 10...

Page 26: ...46 971 40 5 T 1 10 T 1 11 Productivity Product name Productivity imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3330 Series A3 15 sheets minute B4 15 sheets minute A4 30 sheets minute B5 30 sheets minute 12 x 18 7 sheets minute 11 x 17 15 sheets minute LGL 15 sheets minute LTR 30 sheets minute EXEC 20 sheets minute imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3325 Series A3 15 sheets minute B4 15 sheets minute A4 25 sheets minute B5 25 sheets min...

Page 27: ...to 139 6 Custom paper size 2 4 216 to 457 2 Custom paper size 3 1 182 to 215 9 139 7 to 209 9 Custom paper size 3 2 216 to 431 8 Custom paper size 3 3 431 9 to 457 2 Custom paper size 5 1 182 to 209 9 210 to 297 Custom paper size 5 2 210 to 215 9 210 to 279 3 Custom paper size 5 3 216 to 279 3 Custom paper size 5 4 279 4 to 431 8 Custom paper size 5 6 431 9 to 457 2 210 to 297 Custom paper size 6 ...

Page 28: ...Yes Yes Yes STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes No No No No SRA3 450 320 Yes No No No No 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes No Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes No Yes Yes Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes No Yes Yes Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A OFFICIO 340 220 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A LTR 220 280 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A LTRR 280 220 Yes No Yes Yes Ye...

Page 29: ...12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes No Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes No Yes Yes Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes No Yes Yes Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A OFFICIO 340 220 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A LTR 220 280 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A LTRR 280 220 Yes No Yes Yes Yes GLTR R 266 7 203 2 Yes No Yes Yes Yes GLTR 203 2 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Y...

Page 30: ...o No A5R 210 148 Yes No No No No 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes No No No No LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes No No No No LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes No No No No LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes No No No No STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes No No No No STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes No No No No SRA3 450 320 Yes No No No No 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes No No No No EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes No No No No K8 390 270 Yes No No No No K16 195 270 Yes No No No No Free Size 139 7 to...

Page 31: ...97 210 Yes No No No No A4 210 297 Yes No No No No B5R 257 182 Yes No No No No B5 182 257 Yes No No No No A5 148 210 Yes No No No No A5R 210 148 Yes No No No No 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes No No No No LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes No No No No LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes No No No No LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes No No No No STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes No No No No STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes No No No No SRA3 450 320 Yes No No No No 12x18 457 2 3...

Page 32: ...No No No 11x17 431 8 279 4 Yes No No No No LGL 355 6 215 9 Yes No No No No LTR 215 9 279 4 Yes No No No No LTRR 279 4 215 9 Yes No No No No STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes No No No No STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes No No No No SRA3 450 320 Yes No No No No 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes No No No No EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes No No No No K8 390 270 Yes No No No No K16 195 270 Yes No No No No Free Size 139 7 to 630 98 4 to 320 Yes No ...

Page 33: ...R 279 4 215 9 Yes No No No No STMTR 215 9 139 7 Yes No No No No STMT 139 7 215 9 Yes No No No No SRA3 450 320 Yes No No No No 12x18 457 2 304 8 Yes No No No No EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes No No No No K8 390 270 Yes No No No No K16 195 270 Yes No No No No Free Size 139 7 to 630 98 4 to 320 Yes No No No No Custom paper size 0 2 0 3 0 4 1 1 1 2 1 3 2 1 2 2 2 3 2 4 3 1 3 2 3 3 5 1 5 2 5 3 5 4 5 6 6 1 6 2 6 3...

Page 34: ...2x18 457 2 304 8 Yes No Yes Yes Yes EXEC 184 1 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes OFFICIO 317 5 215 9 Yes No Yes Yes Yes E OFFICIO 320 220 Yes No Yes Yes Yes B OFFICIO 355 216 Yes No Yes Yes Yes M OFFICIO 341 216 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A OFFICIO 340 220 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A LTR 220 280 Yes No Yes Yes Yes A LTRR 280 220 Yes No Yes Yes Yes GLTR R 266 7 203 2 Yes No Yes Yes Yes GLTR 203 2 266 7 Yes Yes Yes Yes Ye...

Page 35: ...104 7 Yes No Yes No No Monarch_R 190 5 98 4 Yes No Yes No No ISO C5_R 229 162 Yes No No No No DL_R 220 110 Yes No Yes No No Nagagata 3_R 235 120 Yes No Yes No No Younagagata 3_R 235 120 Yes No Yes No No Kakugata 2_R 332 240 Yes No Yes No No COM10 104 7 241 3 Yes Yes No No No Monarch 98 4 190 5 Yes No No No No ISO C5 162 229 Yes Yes No No No DL 110 220 Yes Yes No No No Nagagata 3 120 235 Yes Yes No...

Page 36: ...ner Unit Waste Toner Container Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 F 1 15 Control Panel Touch Panel Display Numeric key Brightness Adjustment Dial Energy Saver key Volume Settings key Counter Check key Stop key Start key Settings Registration key Clear key Processing Data Indicator Error Indicator Main Power Indicator ID Log In Out key Edit Pen Main Menu Quick Menu Status Monitor Cancel Re...

Page 37: ...lanation Technical Explanation Basic Configuration Document Exposure Main Controller Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System Pickup Feed System External Auxiliary System MEAP Embedded RDS Updater DCM ...

Page 38: ... Feed System Controller System Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System and Pickup Feed System Pickup Laser Scanner Main Controller PCB DC Controller PCB Cassette Pickup Feed System Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System ITB Reader ADF Transfer Fixing Delivery Deplexing Feed Drum Drum Drum Drum Original Exposure and Feed System Controller System Multi purpose ...

Page 39: ...CB Scan magnification change is also used for 300dpi SEND job Number of line of Reading sensor 4 lines R G B B W Original size detection In BOOK mode Horizontal direction detection by Scanner unit sensor scanner unit Vertical scanning Detection by the Reflection Sensor Original Size Sensor AB configuration AK configuration or Original Size Sensor Inch Total 1 point 2 points for global In DADF mode...

Page 40: ...ensor AB type AK type PS_R1 Size detection in vertical direction AB type AK type Original size sensor INCH type PS_R2 Size detection in vertical direction INCH type Scanner unit Image reading analog image processing Reader Heater HTR01 To prevent condensation from forming on the reader F 2 4 T 2 2 Scanner Unit Original exposure and scanning are performed by the integrated scanner unit of LED turnd...

Page 41: ...rated light is exposed to the original through the reflection plate Reading sensor The Reading Sensor scans the image per 1 image line The Reading Sensor has 4 lines R G B B W but only uses 3 lines R G B when scanning images Related Error Codes E302 0001 White Shading error E302 0002 Black Shading error Related Alarm Codes 02 0025 Insufficient Scanner Unit LED light intensity alarm Reader Heater S...

Page 42: ...e signal EEP ROM FLASH PCB CPU Gain correction data T 2 3 F 2 6 Shading Correction Shading correction corrects unevenness of the output of the Reading Sensor In shading correction there is a type of shading correction that is executed per job Operating timing When a job starts Shading correction is performed for each scanning of original With this operation light of LED Lamp is emitted to the Stan...

Page 43: ...for dust 1 Processing to avoid dust when starting the first stream reading job after turning ON the power when ending a stream reading job etc Like the time of completion of a job presence absence of dust is detected at all positions 1 2 3 4 and 5 in that order The position where dust is least present is used as the reading position and reading starts 2 3 4 1 5 2 3 4 1 5 0 5 mm 0 5 mm F 2 8 2 Proc...

Page 44: ...rocessing is performed based on the saved color displacement correction values Reader Scan 100 RG 100 GB T 2 4 F 2 10 T 2 5 Original Size Detection Overview This machine determines the size of an original by the combination of the measurement results of the reflected light at particular points of the Reflection Sensor and Reading Sensor Furthermore two points are measured for each size to perform ...

Page 45: ...vice Tasks Service Mode Adjustment White Level Adjustment Luminance levels when the same white is read using the Copyboard and DF are automatically adjusted Service mode COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 copyboard COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL2 DF MTF Adjustment Color differences and moire caused by the differences in the MTF of the Reading Unit are reduced Service mode COPIER ADJUST CCD MTF CLC Copyboar...

Page 46: ...t Settings Data Management TPM Settings is On Default Off F 2 12 T 2 7 Main controller PCB J17 USB D LAN USB H TPM FAN FAX Laser FAX FAX UI DEVICE PORT Voice Internal I F External I F HDD ADF ADF Reader HDD FLASH Memory J6 J4 J28 J27 J19 J16 J7 J8 J3 J5 J15 J14 J32 J25 J20 J18 J22 J29 J35 J23 J38 J36 J33 J37 J40 J10 J24 J30 Image Data Analyzer PCB CC VI CARD DC Controller Low voltage power supply ...

Page 47: ...The OS boot file is not found 4002 Error in file system on the Flash PCB The OS kernel is not found E748 2010 Flash PCB error HDD error IPL boot program not found or HDD not recognized Shutdown Sequence Before shutting down the power supply it is necessary to perform the HDD completion process Purpose to prevent damage on the HDD and execute the fixing disengagement operation This sequential proce...

Page 48: ...ller PCB LAN Controller Interpreter HDD Writing Reading To DC Controller Network Image Data Buffer Memory Rendering HDD Print the Image Processing Extension Processing F 2 14 F 2 15 SEND Data Conversion JPEG Encode Main Controller PCB LAN Controller HDD Writing Reading Network Image Data Buffer Memory HDD Image Processing Resolution Conversion Image rotation JPEG Conversion Extension Reader Same a...

Page 49: ...Conversion FAX Reader Image Processing Resolution Conversion Image rotation Image Level Cell Main Controller PCB HDD Writing Reading Image Data Buffer Memory HDD Fax Receive HDD FAX HDD Writing Reading To DC Controller Image Data Buffer Memory Image Processing Color Space Conversion Resolution Conversion JBIG Conversion Main Controller PCB F 2 18 F 2 19 ...

Page 50: ...ta is erased by normal procedure If data is erased with the Data Erase Kit 0 Data or randam data is overwritten after every output Erase only management data after output Actual data remains in the hard disk Erase remaining job data Management Information Actual Data Management Information Actual Data Actual Data Actual Data Management Information When the Data Erase Kit is enabled unneeded or del...

Page 51: ...and installed in another MFP as the TPM PCB retains the model information when the TPM setting is enabled If the machine s system is intruded upon via the network The setting is required in Settings Registration mode Management Settings Data Management TPM Settings On default Off F 2 21 Security Information Structure The operation of the security function differs depending on the TPM settings on t...

Page 52: ... TPM key public key shared key and password is enabled When TPM Settings is Off In this case two stage security information shared key and password is enabled Works to be Done Before and After Introduction The setting is required in Settings Registration mode TPM Settings at the time of shipment Off Enabling of the Function Backup of TPM key Restoration of TPM key Disabling of the Function As a ge...

Page 53: ...ng of the Function CAUTION Be sure to recommend to the user administrator to set the System PIN beforehand After configuring the TPM Settings to On back up the TPM key but it can only be done once It is effective to set the System PIN as a means to prevent a situation in which those other than the administrator obtains the backup file due to the TPM key not having been backed up 1 Set Management S...

Page 54: ... The USB I F host is located on the Control Panel side and the Main Controller PCB side CAUTION Connect only one USB flash drive If two or more are connected when the backup operation is executed a message is displayed indicating that the backup has failed NOTE As the backup file of the TPM key is saved by serial number backup files of multiple machines can be saved in the USB flash drive 2 Execut...

Page 55: ... under lock and key Do not store the backup files of the TPM keys in a USB flash drive at a location to which the general public has access such as on a server NOTE Name of the backup file of the TPM key The serial number of the machine is automatically assigned to the name of the backup file Restoration of TPM key The operation is almost the same as that of backup Differences When the restoration...

Page 56: ...s needs to be executed Since user information on the hard disk is all initialized at this time be sure to back up the data before configuring the TPM Setting to Off 1 Before deleting the data back up or export necessary data List of Data that is Deleted Data saved in Mail Box Data saved in the reception tray Confidential Fax Inbox Memory RX Inbox Destination information registered in the address b...

Page 57: ...hine was installed F 2 30 Target data for encryption decryption reference Type Application Function Security Information Storage Destination Password PIN Confidential Fax Inbox Password for Confidential Fax Inbox Hard disk SEND Address Book PIN Hard disk LDAP Server password FLASH POP Server password FLASH Password of time stamp PDF FLASH Password of Adobe ES Rights Management server FLASH UI Serv...

Page 58: ...yption Board encrypts the data sent from the controller and records it in the hard disk The Encryption Board decodes the encrypted data saved in the hard disk and then sends it to the controller Conditions of Encryption Board Operation As the Encryption Board includes a function to identify and authenticate the host machine an error occurs when an once used Encryption Board is installed to a diffe...

Page 59: ...tion kit and install the HDD Data Encryption Kit 1 Initialize the Encryption Board 2 Format the hard disk Clearing of the Main Controller COPIER FUNCTION MN CON Deleted After MN CON clear process is done As the authentication information is not cleared by the clearing of MN CON there is no work to be done specific to the HDD Encryption Kit Related Error Code E602 2000 Authentication error between ...

Page 60: ...onsists of the Laser Assembly and the Scanner Motor and is controlled by the signal from the DC Controller This machine adopts the 1 polygon 4 laser method to realize a compact size UN04 DC Controller PCB UN05 Main Controller PCB UN09 UN08 M01 2 3 4 5 7 1 8 6 1 Polygon Mirror UN08 C Bk Laser Driver PCB 2 Photosensitive Drum UN09 Y M Laser Driver PCB 3 APC signal M01 Scanner Motor 4 Video signal 5 ...

Page 61: ...CB 3 Polygon Mirror M01 Scanner Motor F 2 33 Specification Item Description Wave length 780 to 800 nm Laser type Infrared invisible laser Laser output 10 mW Number of Laser Scanner Units 1 Number of laser beams 1 beam per color scanning Resolution At full speed 600 dpi At half speed 600 or 1200 dpi Motor type Brushless motor Motor revolutions Approx 42 300 rpm full half speed Number of Polygon Mir...

Page 62: ...orms laser scanning using one Scanner Motor and four laser diodes The multifaceted mirror on one Scanner Motor can scan lasers equivalent to four stations thereby realizing space saving Below is the Laser Scanner Unit outline drawing UN08 M01 UN09 1 1 2 4 2 3 F 2 34 1 Reflection Mirror UN08 C Bk Laser Driver PCB 2 Imaging Lens UN09 Y M Laser Driver PCB 3 Photosensitive Drum M01 Scanner Motor ...

Page 63: ...trol BD correction control Laser scanner motor control Laser ON OFF control Main Controller PCB UN05 DC Controller PCB UN04 Laser Scanner Unit Laser Scanner Motor Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 T 2 13 F 2 35 Laser ON OFF control Purpose Turns the laser beam ON and OFF according to the combination of laser control signals Execution timing After Power On Control description The...

Page 64: ... Controller 4 The Main Controller synchronizes with this signal and sends video signals Y_VDO M_ VDO C_VDO and Bk_VDO to the Y M and C Bk Laser Driver PCBs while regarding the reference BD signal as the vertical scanning synchronous signal BD for each line This enables each Laser Driver PCB to emit a laser beam from a fixed position for each line NOTE As the BD signal is the horizontal scanning sy...

Page 65: ... and sent to the Main Controller 2 The Main Controller synchronizes with ITOP signal and generates video signals Y_VDO M_VDO C_VDO and Bk_VDO and sends them to the Laser Scanner Unit 3 The Laser Scanner Unit generates the laser drive signals based on the video signals At this timing the Laser Scanner Unit emits laser beams to match the leading edge of image with that of paper NOTE If the process s...

Page 66: ... size T3 is differ by feeding control T1 T 2 15 F 2 41 Laser scanner motor control Purpose Rotates the Scanner Motor at a specific speed Execution Timing At power on and at each print Control description Scanner Motor rotation speed is controlled by the Y M Laser Driver PCB 1 The Y M Laser Driver PCB outputs Scanner Motor control signals acceleration signal ACC deceleration signal DEC to the Scann...

Page 67: ...of the Polygon Mirror was not detected after phase lock by BD control APC Auto Power Control control Purpose Ensures constant laser beam light intensity for each line Execution Timing For each line before writing the image Control description 1 The Y M Laser Driver PCB outputs the APC signal to the Laser Driver IC on each Laser Driver PCB 2 The APC mode is set for the Y M and C Bk Laser Driver PCB...

Page 68: ...ected by correcting the write start timing based on the above correction value Gap Gap Gap Gap BD interval Specified value Before correction After correction BD1 BD2 BD1 BD2 BD1 BD2 START END Scanner motor control finish Constant speed rotation detection BD interval measurement Write start position correction value calculation Write start position correction value F 2 44 Related Error Code E100 00...

Page 69: ...nsity Sensor is also used Primary Charging Charging method Roller charging Cleaning Sponge Roller Toner Container Toner Container detection Yes Replacement of Toner Container during continuous print Disabled Transfer method Intermediate transfer ITB ITB Unit Circumferential length Inner circumferential length 791 9 mm Cleaning Cleaning Blade Belt displacement correction Controlled by rib Primary t...

Page 70: ...exposure laser exposed area becomes image area Developing block 3 Development With the dry 2 component AC developing method toner that has been negatively charged by the Developing Cylinder is attached to the Photosensitive Drum Transfer block 4 Primary transfer Toner on the surface of the Photosensitive Drum is transferred to the ITB by applying positive potential from back side of the ITB 5 Seco...

Page 71: ... Developing bias DC DC Developing Cylinder Developing bias AC AC Primary transfer bias DC Primary Transfer Roller Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN02 Secondary transfer bias DC Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB UN03 The abovementioned biases are generated by the 2 High Voltage PCBs and are also supplied to the loads used in printing process Y M C BK Primary Tra...

Page 72: ...Control Patch Sensor Adjustment Auto Gradation Adjustment PASCAL Control Other Controls Special Controls Warm up Rotation Control Behavior When Color Printing is Limited or There is No Color Toner Drum Unit Developing Unit Parts Drive Configuration CL01 CL02 CL03 CL04 M10 M02 M03 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Parts name Role 1 Developing Cylinder The toner and carrier inside the Developer Container are coated on ...

Page 73: ...n the Photosensitive Drum Next residual toner is fed to the Waste Toner Container by the rotation of the Cleaning Screw Drum Cleaning Pre exposure Control Purpose To remove residual charge from the Photosensitive Drum surface by emitting light from the Pre exposure LED Ghost imaging etc is reduced by removing residual charge F 2 48 T 2 19 Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MIXC P PRE EXP Lightin...

Page 74: ...t be detected alarm code 09 0010 0011 0012 0013 is generated Host machine operation If the Drum Unit is detected as absent Cannot recognize the drum unit is displayed on the LUI status line F 2 49 NOTE Drum Unit detection may not be executed at times such as at recovery from sleep mode of 8 or more hours No drum jam is detected when a print job is executed with no Drum Unit installed in the machin...

Page 75: ...v 2 COPIER OPTION USER P CRG LF 0 Hide 4 During the period from when a pre toner low alarm is sent to when a replacement completion alarm is sent the next pre toner low alarm is not sent Displayed in COPIER DISPLAY ALARM 2 5 Displayed in COPIER DISPLAY ALARM 3 T 2 20 Primary Charging Primary charging bias control Purpose To apply voltage to the Primary Charging Roller in order to charge the Photos...

Page 76: ...UN27 Developing AC bias The bias to improve image quality UN04 UN03 DC Controller PCB Secondary Transfer High voltage PCB 1 Parts name 1 Developing Cylinder F 2 51 T 2 22 Transfer Separation Parts Drive Configuration M02 4 5 3 2 1 Parts name Role 1 Primary Transfer Roller Toner on the Photosensitive Drum is attracted to the ITB 2 ITB Cleaning Screw Residual toner inside the ITB Cleaner Unit is fed...

Page 77: ...ntal changes are detected by the Environment Sensor from when the previous ATVC was executed Automatic adjustment by replacement Drum Unit replacement When a new Drum Unit is inserted Replace the Developing Unit When INISET Y M C K 4C is executed in service mode At initial installation At power on At initial installation Related Service Mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P 1ATVC EX Exe of primary transfer ...

Page 78: ...y Transfer Outer Roller There are 2 types of the secondary transfer bias the DC positive and the DC negative to apply bias with the following purpose DC positive Toner on the ITB is transferred to a paper when printing DC negative Toner on the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller is attracted onto the ITB when cleaning The secondary transfer bias value is determined by the ATVC control with the DC Cont...

Page 79: ...te Bk mode Color mode Full disengagement mode Related Error Code E074 0001 0002 ITB HP time out error F 2 54 Status of each mode timing to enter each mode Mode to shift to State Shift timings Bk mode Only the Bk Primary Transfer Roller is engaged Detected by the Primary Transfer Disengagement HP Sensor PS33 When shifting to standby mode While in Deepsleep mode At B W printing 1 M08 M08 CL mode All...

Page 80: ...e rib is placed over the ITB Tension Roller or the flange the cycle of the side of the belt on which the rib is mounted over the roller or the flange becomes faster and a force acts to restore it F 2 55 T 2 27 ITB Cleaning Purpose To remove residual toner on the ITB Control description 1 The ITB Cleaning Blade scrapes toner on the ITB 2 The scraped toner is fed to the Waste Toner Container by the ...

Page 81: ...m jam Jam occurrence At startup At main power on 8 hours or more have elapsed in high speed startup mode At normal startup At recovery from sleep mode 8 hours or more have elapsed in sleep mode Automatic adjustment by replacement Drum Unit replacement When a new Drum Unit is inserted Replace the Developing Unit When FUNCTION INSTALL INISET Y M C K 4C is executed Control timing Adjustment timing Co...

Page 82: ...vironment Yes High temperature and high humidity environment Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 hours or more have elapsed in high speed startup mode Yes At initial installation Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes At recovery from sleep mode 8 hours or more have elapsed in sleep mode Yes Yes 8 hours or more have elapsed in sleep mode high temperature and high humidity environment Yes Yes Yes Yes When a job starts At initial rotat...

Page 83: ...ler PCB outputs patch data in each color Y M C Bk to the DC Controller PCB 2 The DC Controller PCB forms a patch pattern of each color Y M C Bk on the ITB 3 The DC Controller PCB measures the patch pattern using the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear Front UN25 26 and the result is returned to the Main Controller PCB 4 The Main Controller PCB compares this measured data with the reference data fo...

Page 84: ...d the upper limit during color fine adjustment 34 2201 As a result of wrong detection processing data that can be used for correction in the vertical scanning direction was not found M 34 2211 As a result of wrong detection processing data that can be used for correction in the horizontal scanning direction was not found M 34 2301 As a result of wrong detection processing data that can be used for...

Page 85: ...Related Service Mode COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW HPFL DSP Set hvy prntr 1200dpi dedicated mod dspl 0 Hide 1 Display plain paper heavy paper 2 Display standard printer 1200 dpi dedicated mode 3 Display standard plain paper standard heavy paper printer 1200 dpi dedicated mode Patch image data Reader Printer PASCAL control F 2 62 Toner Supply Area Parts Drive Configuration Toner is supplied from the Toner...

Page 86: ...ection Purpose To detect the state of the Toner Container The Bottle New Old Detection Sensor Y M C Bk UN39 UN40 UN41 UN42 detects the state from the IC tag of the Toner Container UN39 40 41 42 1 Screen display Message Status Wrong cartridge color may be inserted A toner cartridge of the wrong color is inserted Wrong item no cart may be inserted A toner cartridge with the wrong item number is inse...

Page 87: ...ch color is corrected to the target value at the abovementioned control timing and is controlled to achieve an appropriate toner supply to the Developing Unit The DC Controller PCB determines toner supply amount by the following 2 data Toner Density Sensor output value DC Controller Video count value Main Controller The DC Controller PCB turns ON the Bottle Motors YM CK M04 05 when it determines t...

Page 88: ...ottle Motor YM Bottle Motor CK Toner Supply Sensor Flag 1 Developing Motor Toner Feed Screw 2 Toner Density Sensor Title Toner Container Description Toner is supplied from the Toner Container to the Developing Unit Supply timing When toner supply is determined necessary by the result of ATR control toner is supplied Operation of the host machine The Bottle Motor YM CK M04 M05 are driven The supply...

Page 89: ...ly Sensor to drop to the cut off part of the Toner Bottle as shown in the figure below which in turn switches OFF the sensor When the flag then moves away from the cut off part of the Toner Supply Sensor the sensor is switched ON While the Toner Supply Sensor is in turned OFF 1 block s worth of toner is supplied to the Developing Unit PS26 27 28 29 OFF ON 2 3 3 1 F 2 70 F 2 71 Parts name 1 Flag 2 ...

Page 90: ...ION DSPLY SW T LW LVL is lowered than the initial value due to the margin of the toner supply count 4 Toner supply count shows the level of toner supplied from the Toner Container to the Developing Unit 5 When an unidentified Toner Bottle is used pre toner low alarm is generated at the same time no toner is detected and the machine stops 6 Alarm code created by UGW it is not recorded in the LUI lo...

Page 91: ...he toner level accumulated in the Waste Toner Container UN04 M17 Video count Number of sheets Toner low SensorON Waste Toner Container preparation warning Sensor OFF DC Controller PCB UN30 Waste Toner Sensor Registration Motor Detection description Pre toner low alarm Waste Toner Container Preparation Alarm 1 Waste Toner Container Full Detection timing After paper equivalent to approx 3000 counts ...

Page 92: ... black band Black band sequence Control timing Conditions At paper interval For each 100 accumulated images When transparency is fed At job completion For each 70 accumulated images If continuous printing is performed while toner has not been sent to the ITB Cleaning Blade the Cleaning Blade may be bent up Because of this toner solid Bk with the width of 297 mm and the length of 1 mm is transferre...

Page 93: ...Long No high temperature and high humidity environment Short When door is closed High temperature and high humidity environment None No high temperature and high humidity environment None Warm up rotation control is not executed when Insert the waste toner container Replace the waste toner container or Replace toner cartridge Black is displayed Warm up rotation control Long Short None Primary Tran...

Page 94: ... Unit is new Whether the Fixing Unit is new can be detected F 2 76 Specifications Item Function Method Fixing method On demand fixing Fixing speed 119 4 mm s 1 1 speed 59 7 mm s 1 2 speed Heater Ceramic Heater The Main Heater heat distribution high at center and the Sub Heater heat distribution high at edges are individually driven The heater activation rate changes according to the paper size Pur...

Page 95: ...Temperature is controlled and abnormal temperature increase is detected TH01_01 Sub Thermistor 2 This is engaged with Heater Non paper feed area Installed at the rear side of the host machine Temperature is controlled and temperature at the edge and abnormal temperature increase are detected TH01_03 Sub Thermistor 1 This is engaged with Heater Non paper feed area Installed at the front side of the...

Page 96: ... temperature increase at the edge or temperature decrease Productivity throughput decreases Down sequence when feeding small size paper Down sequence when using paper of mixed sizes and types F 2 78 Standby Temperature Control Flaying start control temperature Time PRNT STBY INTR Fixing temperature Command for flying start Command for print start Flying Start Purpose To reduce time to print the fi...

Page 97: ...paper width is 300 mm or less Paper type Paper weight g m2 Resolution dpi Fixing speed mm s Target temperature deg C Color B W Thin paper 52 to 63 600 119 4 162 to 199 162 to 199 Plain paper 1 64 to 75 169 to 207 169 to 207 Plain paper 2 76 to 90 180 to 214 173 to 209 Plain paper 3 91 to 105 195 to 230 182 to 217 Recycled paper 1 64 to 75 169 to 207 169 to 207 Recycled paper 2 76 to 90 175 to 209 ...

Page 98: ...tration control ATVC control 2 Determined by the elapsed time since the previous fixing temperature control including standby control and the fixing temperature when startup control started T 2 46 Related Service Mode Display of Thermistor detection temperature Lv 1 COPIER DISPLAY ANALOG FIX E To display the center temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Main Thermistor FIX E2 To display ...

Page 99: ...62 to 199 162 to 199 15 to 4 Plain paper 1 64 to 75 169 to 207 169 to 207 Plain paper 2 76 to 90 180 to 214 173 to 209 Plain paper 3 91 to 105 195 to 230 182 to 217 Recycled paper 1 64 to 75 169 to 207 169 to 207 Recycled paper 2 76 to 90 175 to 209 169 to 203 Recycled paper 3 91 to 105 195 to 230 182 to 217 Color paper 64 to 82 169 to 207 169 to 207 Tracing paper 64 to 99 180 to 214 173 to 209 Pr...

Page 100: ... C 0 0 deg C default 1 2 deg C 2 4 deg C 3 6 deg C 4 8 deg C T 2 48 Down Sequence When Using Paper of Mixed Size and Mixed Type Purpose When feeding a sheet with a wider width than a preceding sheet during continuous printing temperature at the non paper feed area of the Fixing Film increases causing fixing offset and wrinkles upon feeding succeeding sheets This down sequence controls temperature ...

Page 101: ...on condition timing of engagement operation At power on At recovery from sleep mode At warm up rotation When the Fixing Roller is in a disengaged position at the start of a job At recovery from jam and error Disabled when the 24V interlock is disconnected due to reasons such as door being open Execution condition timing of disengagement operation At power off When entering sleep mode At occurrence...

Page 102: ...g Motor as follows 1 When the paper leading edge passes 23 mm in front of the Fixing Nip Assembly the Fixing Motor drive speed is decelerated by 4 5 for A4 LTR plain paper relative to the process speed The decelerated speed is maintained until the paper leading edge passes over 12 mm from the fixing nip 2 When the Arch Sensor PS11 is ON After the Arch Sensor has been detected ON for consecutive 20...

Page 103: ...ches 2 150 hours 2 Number of sheets fed Displayed when 150 000 sheets have been fed 3 Total drive time Number of sheets fed Displayed when either of above conditions 1 or 2 is first detected F 2 85 When these conditions reach certain limits The fixing assembly needs to be replaced is displayed on the Control Panel status line Related Service Mode Lv 2 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW FXMSG SW ON OFF Fixing ...

Page 104: ...2 second Clear 0006 Sub Thermistor 2 detected a temperature of 297 deg C or higher for more than 0 2 second Clear E002 Detection of abnormal temperature increase 0001 Main Thermistor detected a temperature of 40 deg C or lower for 3 sec or longer from when the Fixing Heater was turned ON until start of Temperature control Clear 0002 Sub Thermistor 1 detected a temperature of 40 deg C or lower for ...

Page 105: ...fter the frequency of zero cross signal fell into the specified frequency band the frequency between 43 Hz and 67 Hz could not be detected for 0 5 consecutive sec Not needed Countermeasure When the Fixing Unit Error E001 E002 E003 Occurs When a Fixing Unit related error E001 E002 E003 occurred to previous models a service visit was necessary to clear the error in service mode COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR...

Page 106: ... Tray 100 sheets 80 g m2 paper Paper Size Cassette 1 A4 B5 A5R Custom size 139 7 x 182 to 297 mm x 215 9 mm Envelope Nagagata 3 Yougatanaga 3 ISO C5 Cassette 2 A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5R Custom size 139 7 x 182 to 304 8 x 457 2 mm Envelope Nagagata 3 Yougatanaga 3 Kakugata 2 Monarch COM10 No 10 DL Multi purpose Tray 305 mm x 457 mm 320 mm x 450 mm SRA3 A3 B4 A4 A4R B5 B5R A5 A5R Postcard Reply Postca...

Page 107: ...h Roller 6 Fixing Pressure Roller 17 Cassette 2 Feed Roller 7 Duplex Roller 18 Cassette 2 Separation Roller 8 Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 19 Cassette 2 Pickup Roller 9 Registration Roller 20 Cassette 1 Pickup Roller 10 Duplex Merging Roller 21 First Delivery Roller 11 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller 22 Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller F 2 88 Layout Drawing of Sensors PS52 PS53 PS12 PS10 P...

Page 108: ...or M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M09 Fixing Motor M14 Duplex Merging Motor M11 Duplex Feed Motor M30 Duplex Reverse Motor M12 Registration Motor M31 Second Delivery Motor SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid F 2 90 Without 3 Way Unit M12 M14 M13 M07 M09 SL06 M11 M07 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid M09 Fixing Motor M11 Duplex Feed Motor M12 Registration Motor M13 C...

Page 109: ...te Vertical Path Roller to the point 25 mm short of the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller The speed is variable according to the early or late paper arrival 120 1 to 200 mm s 60 1 to 100 mm s F 2 92 T 2 52 Without 3 Way Unit Reverse Mouth First Delivery Multi purpose Tray Pickup Cassette 2 Pickup Cassette 1 Pickup 1 1 speed 200mm sec 1 2 speed 100mm sec Acceleration section Section 1 1 speed 1 2 spe...

Page 110: ... Assembly Cassette 1 Cassette 2 Lifter control Cassette Pickup Control Cassette Paper Size Detection Cassette Detection Paper level presence detection Multi purpose Tray Pickup Assembly Multi Purpose Tray Pickup Control Multi purpose Tray paper detection Multi purpose Tray Automatic Size Detection Fixing Registration Assembly Registration Control Reverse Delivery Assembly The number of circulating...

Page 111: ...ensor 7 Cassette 2 Pickup Roller PS07 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor 8 Cassette 2 Vertical Path Roller PS08 Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor M06 Cassette 1 2 Lifter Motor PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A M07 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor PS18 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor PS19 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS20 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B PS24 Casse...

Page 112: ...mined number of times Related Alarm Code 04 0011 Cassette 1 Pickup Retry Error 04 0012 Cassette 2 Pickup Retry Error 04 0013 Cassette 3 Pickup Retry Error 04 0014 Cassette 4 Pickup Retry Error Cassette Paper Size Detection Cassette Detection Result of automatic size detection Paper Size Group for Auto Recog in Drawer 1 All Sizes A B Size Inch Size A K Size A3 A3 A3 No corresponding size A3 B4 B4 B...

Page 113: ... the width is detected in accordance with the combination of ON OFF When the cassette presence paper size is changed the DC Controller notifies the Main Controller of the status change NOTE When an error in the lifter is detected the cassette presence absence and paper size status are not detected Paper size Width Length Size Switch A Width Detection 1 2 3 A4 297 0 210 0 OFF OFF ON B5 257 0 182 0 ...

Page 114: ...1 8 OFF ON ON ON OFF OFF or ON LGL 215 9 355 6 ON OFF OFF ON ON ON LTR R 215 9 279 4 ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF EXEC 267 0 184 0 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF or ON A4 297 0 210 0 OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON B5 257 0 182 0 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF LTR 279 4 215 9 OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON A5 R 148 5 210 0 ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON K8 270 0 390 0 ON ON ON ON OFF ON K16 R 195 0 270 0 ON OFF ON OFF ON ON or OFF K16 270 0 195 0 ON ON...

Page 115: ...ensor Cassette Lifter Sensor The paper level is displayed in four levels in the Control Panel Level display Level display Level Paper Level Sensor A Paper Level Sensor B Paper Sensor Cassette Lifter Sensor 100 to 50 OFF OFF ON ON 50 to 10 OFF ON ON ON 10 to 0 ON OFF ON ON 0 OFF ON T 2 59 PS18 PS04 PS17 1 1 OFF ON OFF OFF ON PS05 ON ON ON ON PS05 ON PS05 OFF OFF ON ON PS05 1 Paper PS04 Cassette 1 L...

Page 116: ...ar PS04 Cassette 1 Lifter Sensor 2 Paper Detection Lever PS05 Cassette 1 Paper Sensor 3 Middle Plate PS17 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor A PS18 Cassette 1 Paper Level Sensor B F 2 100 Cassette 2 PS06 PS07 2 PS20 PS19 3 1 1 Lifter Gear PS06 Cassette 2 Lifter Sensor 2 Paper Detection Lever PS07 Cassette 2 Paper Sensor 3 Middle Plate PS19 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS20 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sen...

Page 117: ...picked up from the Multi purpose Tray by the reverse rotation of the Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M13 Multi purpose Tray Pickup HP Sensor Error When an error in the Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M13 or the Multi purpose Tray Pickup HP Sensor PS32 is detected no paper is displayed for the the Multi purpose Tray pickup and an alarm code is issued Related Alarm Code 04 ...

Page 118: ...ing size 11 x 17 No corresponding size K8 K16 B5 No corresponding size LTR EXEC No corresponding size K16 Postcard Blank unless Paper Settings is performed due to non standard size Envelope Custom size Country US CN Destinations other than the above Default Setting Inch Size A K Size A B Size T 2 60 T 2 61 Automatic size detection is performed by three sensors Multi purpose Tray Width Sensing PCB ...

Page 119: ...4 Duplex Merging Motor F 2 103 Registration Control Purpose To correct paper skew align the leading edges of image and paper Skew correction control The paper leading edge runs into the stopped Registration Roller thereby generating an arch in order to correct the skew Then non stop registration control or stop registration control is executed according to the paper feed condition M12 M12 PS22 M12...

Page 120: ...ion paper interval between sheets can be shortened to improve productivity A feed delay jam 0190 occurs when paper feed is delayed at non stop registration control due to the paper not arriving in time for the image When the paper arrives too early at non stop registration control stop registration control is executed Stop Registration Control This control is executed to stop paper using the Regis...

Page 121: ...the number of circulating sheets feed route reverse position and standby position 1 and 2 sided differ according to the set length of fixed size paper and delivery outlet Timing to wait at standby position 1 sided and 2 sided When entering down sequence When executing auto adjustment When controller processing is delayed Reverse Position and Standby Position 1 and 2 sided Long path Short path Reve...

Page 122: ...path R2 S1 S2 S4 Second delivery 1 sheet Short path R1 S1 S2 S3 Third delivery Longer than 11 x 17 to 12 x 18 or shorter 432 1 to 457 2 mm First Delivery 1 sheet Short path R1 S1 S2 S3 Second delivery Third delivery Delivery not supported Since the same drive is used for the delivery from the third delivery and the duplex path the productivity is lower than that of the delivery from the first seco...

Page 123: ...ll Color Single Color Large Print Full Color Single Color Small 1 US 102 109 229 230 321 322 000 General model Total 1 Total Black 1 Copy Print Full Color Large Copy Print Full Color Small Total Single Color 1 Total 1 2 sided 1 SG KR CN 101 108 401 402 118 114 000 Target Number displayed for each counter in service mode Item Target country code Counter 1 Counter 2 Counter 3 Counter 4 Counter 5 Cou...

Page 124: ...ON FNC SW CONFIG The three digit numbers in the counter column show the setting value of the following service mode items Lv 1 COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER 1 to 8 Counters 2 to 8 can be changed in service mode COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER2 to 8 The type of counter display can be switched between the former and new methods in Lv 1 service mode COPIER OPTION USER CNT SW T 2 67 Country code Country Count...

Page 125: ...s voltages to switch the fan rotation speed Fan Drive Sequence Controlled by DCON MCON Fan Name Front Fan Motor Fan Power Supply Cooling Fan Controller Fan Standby Half speed Stopped 2 Half speed Stopped 2 Stopped 75 At printing 1 sided Half speed 1 Half speed 1 Full speed Full speed 2 sided Full speed Half speed Full speed Full speed Reader operation Half speed Stopped 2 Half speed Stopped 2 Half...

Page 126: ...the Main Power Supply and Dehumidification Switch are turned ON T 2 72 T 2 73 Power supply Internal power supply Buffer Path PCB Main Controller PCB Fixing Unit Low Voltage Power Supply PCB DC Controller PCB Main Power SW 3 3V 3 3V 3 3V 24V 24V 24V 12V 5V 5V Interlock SW Dehumidification SW Interlock SW 24V IL_SW Temperature fuse Main Heater Sub Heater 24V IL_SW 24V 5V 24V 5V 12V 6V RMT_RLY1 2 DCO...

Page 127: ...el Power Switch while in Sleep Standby mode the mode is shifted to this mode Sleep Standby Mode In this state only the Control Panel is off while the power is supplied to all other parts Presence of a job is determined and if there is no job the mode is shifted to Deep Sleep Sleep 1 mode When a job is submitted during sleep Deep Sleep Sleep 1 mode the mode is shifted to this mode Sleep 1 Mode In t...

Page 128: ... USB Host System Performance Status An application is communicating via network TCP connection on a port dedicated to CPCA within 15 seconds after reception of UDP Either of SNTP DHCP DHCP6 or eRDS communication is in progress A job is being executed in standby Print Copy SEND FAX Report Forward Save etc During Fax I Fax communication During distribution of device information During export import ...

Page 129: ...he following label is used at the place where attention is required Quick Start Plug Off In addition quick startup is not performed under the following conditions At first startup after the power plug is connected to the outlet Under the following conditions settings the machine always starts up normally even if quick startup is enabled Either of the following devices is connected Serial I F Coin ...

Page 130: ...downloader is active In printer scanner limited functions mode When a login application is switched in SMS When a license has been registered Upon startup by pressing the Control Panel key such as startup in safe mode T 2 79 Effect of the Hub Which Supports Spanning Tree When the network is connected in a loop data transfer efficiency may be lowered due to data continuing to circulate inside this ...

Page 131: ...al Device Authentication An authentication method that can only be used by users registered in the database inside the device enabled at the time of shipment Server Authentication and Local Device Authentication Authentication using an authentication server on a network can be used in addition to Local Device Authentication No Authentication All functions can be used without authentication but sin...

Page 132: ...onditions because Java applets cannot be used Server authentication is set as the user authentication method and Active Directory is set as the authentication server The operating system of the PC is the 64 bit version of Windows 8 The browser being used is the 64 bit version of Internet Explorer The Java environment being used is the 64 bit version of JRE T 2 81 Network ports used Network Ports U...

Page 133: ...reen remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings Authentication Management Preferences http device s IP address 8000 userauth Preference System Manager Linkage automatic ID allocation to System Managers SSO provided the automated function conventionally on Security Agent hereinafter SA to authenticate System Manager by allocating IDs set on SA to domain authentication managers users belong...

Page 134: ...authentication it is necessary to synchronize the time settings of the Active Directory server and the machine and the PC for login If the difference in time setting is 5 minutes or longer an error will occur at the time of login The setting of the allowable difference in time can be changed F 2 116 Server Authentication LDAP Authentication It is one of the user authentication methods using UA is ...

Page 135: ...he time of the device to be within a certain difference With Kerberos authentication the time of the authentication server KDC and authentication client must be synchronized within a certain difference The allowed difference is whichever one of the following is shorter 5 minutes hard coded User Authentication setting Maximum tolerance for computer clock synchronization in the Kerberos Policy setti...

Page 136: ...s Registration of this device and register 7 digit ID and PIN by department This setting restricts the use of this device only to users keying the registered ID and PIN Department IDs and PINs can be registered on the touch panel of this device or Remote UI F 2 118 About SMS Overview MEAP has SMS Service Management Service as a service for managing login services and MEAP applications SMS is a ser...

Page 137: ... Installer Service Password Authentication to Start in System Application Management For information on the procedure refer to Setting the method to login to SMS 1 Access SMS from the browser of a PC on the same network as the MEAP device The URL is as follows URL https IP address of MEAP device 8443 sms Ex https 172 16 188 240 8443 sms Note To encrypt the password information input when logging i...

Page 138: ...hine domain name and host name If an invalid character string such as a low line _ is included in the host name cookies cannot be enabled T 2 86 Initial Display Languages of SMS The SMS of this device supports English Japanese French Italian German Spanish Simplified Chinese Traditional Chinese and Korean Display language can be changed with selecting by the drop down list on a login page The init...

Page 139: ...tallation of such an application Meanwhile MEAP Specifications shows other information than defined by Device Specification ID above including network and security Thus each model does not always have the same version MEAP application declares 1 or more MEAP Specifications required for its execution Declaration of multiple Device Specification IDs means that the application is operable in all the ...

Page 140: ...lared in a statement within the application program It may not necessarily be identical to the name of the program item content Application ID System Application Name Application ID application id items which are declared on the declaration statement in the application program are printed Application Version It is the version of the application bundle version declared in a statement within the app...

Page 141: ...SMS These settings depend on the MEAP application For detailed information refer to the manual for the application F 2 122 Advantages Obtained When Using the Services By using MEAP Application Configuration Service and MEAP Application Log Service as long as the MEAP application supports these services you can perform data management tasks all together In case of devices and MEAP application that ...

Page 142: ...ogin application and at any timing of registration by an application At any timing of registration by an application Deletion Can be used until logout shutdown Can be used until deletion by the application or management tool Encryption of credential data Not supported Data retained on the HDD is encrypted Store Save to Memory in the device HDD in the device T 2 89 Settign Procedure Preparation Net...

Page 143: ...gs Registration Management Settings License Other MEAP Settings SSL Settings ON OFF Network Port Change Procedure The default port of the HTTP server used for MEAP and MEAP applications to provide the servlet function is 8000 and the HTTPS server s default port is 8443 In the case that these ports have already used by the customer who is to introduce this application the MEAP application cannot us...

Page 144: ...ithout using the appropriate license Be sure to select its license file If you are adding a license to an existing application see Procedure Adding a License File If you are updating an existing application stop the application then install the new application or its license file You will not be able to update an application while it is running F 2 125 Note The license file is provided in text fil...

Page 145: ...P application management page is displayed Note Since the status of applications installed with Only Install selected in Operation to Perform is set to Installed it is necessary to click Start to change their status to Started F 2 129 F 2 128 Procedure to Start and Stop a MEAP Application 1 Log in to the SMS and click MEAP Application Management 2 Click Start or Stop shown for the MEAP application...

Page 146: ...a License File Procedure Adding a License File 1 Log on to SMS 2 On MEAP Application Management click the name of the application to which you want to add a license file 3 Click License Management 4 Click Browse and select the license file you want to install F 2 132 F 2 133 5 Click Install 6 Check the content of the confirmation page and click OK F 2 134 ...

Page 147: ...spended the status of the license will be Not Installed and its application will no longer be available for use You can later restore a suspended license file as long as you are doing so on the same iR the device with the same device serial number If the machine needs to be replaced due to a device failure use the transfer license during the replacement See License for forwarding 1 Log on to SMS 2...

Page 148: ...d click the name of the application you want 2 On Application License Information page click License Management F 2 139 F 2 140 3 License Management page appears To download click Download 4 When you have selected Download specify where you want to store the file by following the instructions on the screen 5 To delete click Delete 6 When the dialog to confirm deletion is shown click Yes CAUTION Wi...

Page 149: ...cation to be forwarded see Chapter 2 Procedure to Start and Stop a MEAP Application 2 Move to the download page of license forwarded for the device as sender https IP address of device 8443 sms ForwardLicense F 2 144 F 2 145 3 Specify the application to be forwarded 4 On Application License Information page click License Management 5 Click Disable on the Disable License File 6 The window to confir...

Page 150: ...fer license is the file only to prove the license invalidation it cannot be used for installation to the other device as it is Send the transfer license to the service support contact of your nearest sales company to request issuance of the new license for installation in the new device Note When requesting issuance of license for forwarding inform the sales company of the name of product name and...

Page 151: ...ation file and license file 2 Select Install and Start or Only Install in Operation to Perform and click Install F 2 153 F 2 154 Login Service Uninstallation Procedure In order to uninstall a login service the service needs to be stopped Installed status User Authentication and DepartmentID Authentication cannot be uninstalled even when the service is stopped 1 Access SMS and select Enhanced Syste...

Page 152: ...user name of the Local Device Authentication administrator from those at the time of shipment immediately after you have started using SSO H Since department ID and password are not assigned to domain users distributing setting information where the department ID is enabled to a device where the server authentication is enabled may make the device unable to be logged in F 2 156 Setting the method ...

Page 153: ... 159 F 2 160 Remote UI Access Authentication Management screen to disable integrated authentication from the Remote UI 1 Access the following menu and click the Edit button Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings User Management Authentication Management Preferences 2 Select the setting items in Setting to Disable Integrated Authentication on the bottom of the screen as necessary and c...

Page 154: ...nd function consumes 1 it must be 19 in practice Authentication application is not included in this number The MEAP application which can be started simultaneously is up to 19 Authentication application is not included in this number CAUTION To install an application the user needs to use the following URL when accessing the license control system to obtain a license file In doing so he she needs ...

Page 155: ...e Other MEAP Settings Print System Information Note When System Manager ID and PIN are set go to Top screen and log in as System Manager to continue jobs 2 Press Yes Note MEAP system information was printed out in PDL format conventionally However the information has been printed out in text format instead of PDL format enabling devices without PDL installation to print out information iR C3220 an...

Page 156: ...ou must not perform any other work including checking operation until the HDD has been backed up This arrangement is to prevent a mismatch of MEAP counter readings and the HDD contents and any fault in operation arising as the result of failure to observe this will not be covered by the guarantee of operation Do not disable the license during the period from backup using SST to restoration of data...

Page 157: ... application stored in it will be lost so make a backup of the MEAP application area according to Procedure for Backing Up Restoring the MEAP Application Area if possible If a backup cannot be made the MEAP application and the license files need to be reinstalled As for the MEAP counter information it will not be lost because it is backed up just like the conventional counter If a backup cannot be...

Page 158: ... to a laptop for service operation Register a set of system files of a target product to SST Or prepare USB device of the System file transfer settlement 2 Replacing the drive Prepare the necessary service parts of the HDD and replace the drive 3 Formatting HDD Format the HDD referring to Procedure to format the hard disk 4 Reinstalling the MEAP application When the device has started normally obt...

Page 159: ...As necessary make login service selections and import user information Using USB Devices USB Driver Two types of USB drivers With this device both a dedicated USB driver for installing MEAP applications hereinafter referred to as MEAP driver and a USB system driver hereinafter referred to as system driver can be used System driver and MEAP driver cannot be used together When either of them is used...

Page 160: ...n a manifest file is reflected in the following timing When registering from a manifest file The registration will be enabled when an application is activated and device is restarted The registration will be disabled when an application is stopped and device is restarted Note You can display check the used driver setting at USB device report print described below regardless of whether it is regist...

Page 161: ...mean that the operation of all 84 key Keyboards is guaranteed Note The factory shipment default setting is to enable the use of native main unit functionality USB keyboards Therefore in order to use MEAP application keyboards Use MEAP driver for USB input device in Settings Registration needs to be set to ON factory shipment setting is OFF Operations change as described below in accordance with ON...

Page 162: ...da usb IrDA It is displayed when the dongle is connected hub It is displayed when HUB is connected gpusb It is displayed when the USB driver only for MEAP application is assigned to the input device connected gpusbex It is displayed when a USB device which specific vendor ID Product ID are preferentially registered using a manifest and MEAP API is connected and the USB driver only for MEAP applica...

Page 163: ...thout initializing the password F 2 173 If login is not possible due to exclusive control Since access to SMS is under exclusive control you cannot log in if another user has already logged into the SMS of the same device An example of the exclusive control message If you cannot log in due to exclusive control you need to ask the other user to log out before you can try again Note If you close the...

Page 164: ...ry resources available If the resources such as memory capacity or number of threads are not sufficient the application also cannot be started Delete any unnecessary data to secure sufficient resources If the application still cannot be started after checking the foregoing conditions contact the support department of the sales company Points to Note When Enabling the Quick Startup Settings for Mai...

Page 165: ...re tasks are continuously executed to make up for the delay Problem The tasks of Jan 1 Jan 2 and Jan 3 are executed after quick startup 31 Dec 1 Jan 2 Jan 3 Jan 4 Jan Starting Stopped Quick startup standby 5 Jan The timing the task is expected to be executed The timing the task was actually executed F 2 175 F 2 176 MEAP Safe Mode Outline Use safe mode if you need to start up the system without wor...

Page 166: ...hen restart the device How to cancel MEAP SAFE mode 1 Set 1 in the following service mode Level 2 COPIER Option USER MEAPSAFE 2 Start service mode again after rebooting the device and check that MPS is no longer displayed at the upper left of the screen Collection of MEAP Console Logs When debugging a MEAP application console logs need to be collected in some cases MEAP console logs can be obtaine...

Page 167: ...roxy Server Administrator Customer Environment Sales Company F 2 179 Features and benefits E RDS embedded with a network module in advance can realize a front end processing of e Maintenance imageWARE Remote system without attaching any extra hardware equipment Major Functions Service Browser Service browser is a web browsing functionality only for service technicians in charge and is used for ref...

Page 168: ... detection of an alarm or a service call error ended in failure If a new alarm or service call error occurs while service mode menu data is being obtained after detection of an alarm or a service call error the data being obtained is not sent 2 If alarms service call errors successively occur and if the time of the host machine is corrected or changed while the log is being sent service mode menu ...

Page 169: ...NSTALL RGW ADR Default https a01 ugwdevice net ugw agentif010 3 If the e Maintenance imageWARE Remote contract of the device is invalid be sure to turn OFF the E RDS setting E RDS 0 4 With this machine a communication test can be conducted from the Counter Check on the Control Panel When conducting a communication test from the Counter Check on the Control Panel pay attention on the following poin...

Page 170: ...ned network settings be sure to turn OFF and then ON the main power of this machine Steps to E RDS settings 1 In the following service modes initialize a set value of E RDS Select COPIER Function CLEAR ERDS DAT and touch the OK button NOTE This operation initializes the E RDS settings to factory setting values For the setting values to be initialized see the section of Initializing E RDS settings ...

Page 171: ...eat until OK is displayed NOTE The communication results with UGW can be distinguished by referring to the COM LOG By performing the communication test with UGW E RDS acquires schedule information and starts monitoring and meter reads operation F 2 180 Steps to Service Browser settings 1 In the following service modes enable a service browser Select COPIER Function INSTALL BRWS ACT and then touch ...

Page 172: ...n the becoming NG case Name resolution was failed due to an incorrect host name or DNS server has been halted Network cable is blocked off Proxy server settings is not correct No 2 Q When does E RDS send counter information to UGW How many data is sent A The schedule of data transmitting the start time are determined by settings in the UGW side The send time cannot be specified on the E RDS side D...

Page 173: ...n 10 minutes No 9 Q Is E RDS compatible with Department counter A No E RDS does not support Department counter No 10 Q Is there any setting to be made on the device side to enable the service mode menu transmission function Moreover what is Service mode menu set as the object of transmission A No steps peculiar to Transmitting Service mode menu As for the data that applies to transmission of the s...

Page 174: ...ress In case of IPv4 Select Settings Registration Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings PING Command enter 127 0 0 1 and touch the Start button Does the screen display Response from the host See the next figure YES Proceed to Step 3 NO There is a possibility that this machine s network settings are wrong Check the details of the IPv4 settings once more 3 Confirmation from another PC co...

Page 175: ...screen is displayed as shown in the figure below Example No 04 NOTE A detailed description of the error appears below Information Max 128 characters Touch the OK button to return to the communication error log list screen 4 When a message is displayed take an appropriate action referring to Error code and strings No 2 Symptom A communication test results NG even if network setting is set properly ...

Page 176: ...test COM TEST has done successfully Cause It could be a problem at the UGW side or the network load is temporarily faulty Remedy Try again after a period of time If the same error persists check the UGW status with a network and UGW administrator No 6 Symptom Enabling Service Browser BRWS ACT results NG Cause A communication test with UGW has not been performed or a communication test result is NG...

Page 177: ...match Improper value is written in at the head of the NVMEM domain nonvolatile memory domain of Ae RDS Turn the device OFF ON 9 8xxx 0004 Operation is not supported Method which E RDS is not supporting attempted Contact help desk 10 8xxx 0101 Server response error NULL Communication with UGW has been successful but an error of some sort has prevented UGW from responding When Null is displayed at t...

Page 178: ...e 26 8xxx 201E Proxy authentication error Proxy authentication is failed Check the user name and password required in order to login to the proxy and re enter as needed No Code Character strings Cause Remedy 27 8xxx 2028 Server certificate error No route certificate installed in device Certificate other than that initially registered in the user s operating environment is being used but has not be...

Page 179: ... An internal error such as memory unavailable etc has occurred during a device internal error phase Turn the device OFF ON Or replace the device system software Upgrade 36 xxxx xxxx SUSPEND Initialize Failure Internal error occurred at the initiating E RDS Turn the device OFF ON 1 Hexadecimal indicates an error code returned from UGW Error details in UGW indicates error details returned from UGW T...

Page 180: ...es Yes 1 Manual Yes Yes Yes 1 You can select the version allowed Remote Update T 2 101 UGW linked Download and Update Full Remote Update If the device is linked to UGW and the distribution schedule and update setting are registered on UGW in advance full remote firmware update is available on this device Upon downloaded from CDS the firmware is updated on the device 1 Set up customers device types...

Page 181: ...emote UI Auto No No Yes 1 Manual No No Yes 1 Special download upload via Remote UI Remote UI Specific version only Obtain it separately 1 Only the latest version of Remote update enabled version is downloadable F 2 186 List of Functions The matrix below shows the list of functions provided by Updater Category Function Service Mode Settings Registration Remote UI UGW linked Firmware Checking firmwa...

Page 182: ... mode Remote UI Apply Update Via User mode Local UI Apply Update Via User mode Remote UI b c a Download via SST Update via SST Firmware acquisition 1 Schedules for UGW linked distribution are maintained on CDS F 2 187 MEAP Application System Option Installation Flow MEAP application system option installation method using service mode is not provided Be sure to use the Settings Registration to ins...

Page 183: ...cking Portal button in the setting of not to use Remote Login Service via SMS When a user exits Web browser without clicking Log out from SMS or To Remote UI button Wait for EOJ end of job Function Firmware update will be triggered only after the following jobs are completed This is the Updater specific specification Job Function type Receiving Printing Queued print jobs Sending Queued send jobs C...

Page 184: ...s changed properly the desired firmware may not be able to be selected Market Default Setting of Sales Company s HQ Setting of Sales Company s HQ after Change Canada US CA Latin America US SG LA Hong Kong SG HK Go to the following screen to change the setting of Sales Company s HQ COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL CDS CTL NOTE The list below shows the setting of Sales Company s HQ for CDS CTS by market Chec...

Page 185: ...Ensure to enter https device c cdsknn net cds_soap updaterif in the field beside the Delivery Server URL button If the URL is not entered or a wrong URL is entered in the field click Delivery Server URL button to show the virtual keypad Check the URL and enter the correct one 6 Press OK to set the entered items Now the URL of the distribution server is successfully set Communication Test NOTE Carr...

Page 186: ...Update or UGW linked Download when installing the firmware the service technician must specify the following settings to link with UGW in advance Set 1 in the following service mode COPIER Option FNC SW CDS UGW Specify Set for the following settings Firmware Distribution on the Customer Management screen of the UGW WebPortal settings NOTE See imageWARE Remote Operator s Manual e Maintenance Busine...

Page 187: ...S FIRM Settings Registration screen for Updater when the setting is not enabled CDS FIRM 0 Settings Registration screen for Updater when the setting is enabled CDS FIRM 1 F 2 198 F 2 199 Enabling Install Application Options Button To allow users to install applications using Updater the setting of application installation should be set to ON for users in advance Set 1 in the following service mode...

Page 188: ... Local PCs the setting of firmware installation should be set to ON for users in advance Set 1 in the following service mode COPIER Option FNC SW LOCLFIRM Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is not enabled LOCLFIRM 0 Remote UI screen of Updater when the setting is enabled LOCLFIRM 1 F 2 202 F 2 203 System Management Operations Setting Log Level 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 P...

Page 189: ...s Yes Yes NOTE This list shows the contents of the Log Output Log Output Description Trace Detailed logs for debug Information Logs related to operations done on the system Important Message Update logs output by firmware type Installation logs by MEAP application Logs related to enabled functions by system option Ordinary Error Logs for ordinary errors System Error Logs for internal system errors...

Page 190: ...ations Displaying Logs 4 Press Display Update Logs button 5 System Option MEAP Application Installation Logs and Firmware Update Logs are shown Press OK button to exit this operation F 2 209 F 2 210 System Logs 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Press Software Management Settings button 3 Press Select Log Display button F 2 211 F 2 212 ...

Page 191: ...ogs button 5 Updater internal logs are displayed Press OK button to exit this operation NOTE See the section of Debug Logs under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for more detailed information F 2 213 F 2 214 Communication Test 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Press Software Management Settings button 3 Press Test Communication button F 2 215 F 2 216 ...

Page 192: ...of Version Upgrade Chapter 6 Troubleshooting for more detailed information Setting information and logs update logs system logs are carried over Formatting Hard Disk Since Updater is a MEAP application its contents can be temporarily saved in the MEAP application storage area on PC via SST during formatting or replacing HDD See Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Backup Restore The settings initialized in f...

Page 193: ...ervice technician update the firmware downloaded with UGW linked download before A The previously downloaded firmware in the method of UGW linked download will be overridden by the subsequently downloaded one This is because only one downloaded firmware can be held on the device The firmware downloaded in the method of Service mode linked download and UGW linked download can be checked deleted fro...

Page 194: ... address with comma or semicolon when you enter multiple E mail addresses in the field No 11 Q How long does the firmware update take A Approx 30 min However this does not include the download time Download time relies on the network environment F 2 219 FAQ on Installing MEAP Application System Option No 1 Q What happens if a MEAP application is installed in the system with insufficient HDD free s...

Page 195: ...l Download and Update via Remote UI Yes Yes Yes Special Download and Update via Remote UI Yes Yes For install Application Installation Method Network Settings Enabling Install Application Options Button LMS linked Installation Yes LMA linked installation via Local UI Yes Yes LMS linked installation via Remote UI Yes Yes T 2 108 T 2 109 No 2 Q How can operations using Updater be masked on the users...

Page 196: ... data has been exported by one method it can be exported by another one E g Data which was exported by remote UI can be imported by service mode For details of imageWARE Enterprise Management Console DCM Plug in refer to the e Manual of imageWARE Enterprise Management Console DCM Plug in Items to be Exported The following shows the items to be exported Only setting values are exported Image data s...

Page 197: ...d The setting in which no password is set is allowed only export by service mode No space is allowed in the middle of a password Password is case sensitive At the time of following setting host matchine does not recognize USB device The DCM function is not usable too Settings Registration Preferences External Interface USB Settings Use MEAP Driver for External USB Device On Limitations about Impor...

Page 198: ...nect the USB device to the copy destination machine 6 Execute import by specifying the target files from RESTORE in service mode Refer to Import Procedure of Import Export by Service Mode External F 2 220 Import Export by Service Mode External Import export by service mode allows the selection between USB device and internal HDD for the save destination of DCM files The procedure of import export ...

Page 199: ...software keyboard 0 to 32 characters No password is set when 0 character is entered No space is allowed in the middle of a password Password is case sensitive Limitations regarding the DCM file no password DCM files exported without password can only be imported by service mode They cannot be imported by Settings Registration F 2 223 F 2 224 6 Select BACKUP Press OK to execute export 3 3 2 2 1 1 7...

Page 200: ... No firmware registration is necessary When necessary copy the files which you want to import using a PC in advance Be sure to store them in the root folder of the USB device Do not change the extension from dcm only dcm files can be recognized It is desirable to connect the USB device before entering service mode 1 Connect the USB device 2 Log in to service mode and press RESTORE F 2 229 3 Select...

Page 201: ...ings IPv4 Settings IP Address Settings IP Address Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv6 Settings Manual Address Settings Preferences Network TCP IP Settings DNS Settings DNS Host Domain Name Settings Preferences Network AppleTalk Settings Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings Communication Settings E Mail Address Function Settings Send E Mail I Fax Settings Communication Settings POP Log...

Page 202: ...e Mode Internal Import export by service mode allows the selection between USB device and internal HDD for the save destination of DCM files The procedure of import export when internal HDD is selected is shown below It can be used when recovering the initial status after having tried multiple setting changes temporarily for troubleshooting etc Note DCM must not be used when replacing PCBs Be sure...

Page 203: ...cter string of software keyboard 0 to 32 characters No password is set when 0 character is entered No space is allowed in the middle of a password Password is case sensitive F 2 239 F 2 240 5 Select BACKUP and press OK to execute the export process 3 3 2 2 1 1 6 When OK is displayed in the status column upon completion press Note The specification of the name of the exported file is shown below Mo...

Page 204: ... on the left side of the file name to select and press OK 3 3 2 2 1 1 F 2 244 F 2 245 F 2 246 4 Confirm that is displayed on the right side of the selected file and press 2 2 1 1 3 3 5 Select PASSWD enter a password and then press OK 2 2 1 1 4 4 3 3 Note is displayed on the right side of the file to indicate that the selection of the file has been confirmed is displayed after the password is enter...

Page 205: ...e same model the same series Case C Different model Import to a different machine of a different model a different series Settings Registration Settings Registration Basic Information Setting Information Case A Case B Case C Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings Tam ura Tam ura Paper Size Group for Auto Recog in Drawer Tam ura Tam ura A5R STMTR Paper Selection Tam ura Tam ura Register Favorite...

Page 206: ... Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Computer Name Workgroup Name Settings Tam ura WINS Settings Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura LPD Print Settings Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura RAW Print Settings Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura SNTP Settings Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura FTP Print Settings Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Setting Information Case A Case B Case C Preferences Network TCP IP Settings Use UTF 8 to Display Name of FTP Print Job Tam ...

Page 207: ...ura Tam ura Tam ura 256 bit AES Settings for Encrypted PDF Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Document Scan Lock Operational Settings Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Set Authentication Method Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Setting Information Case A Case B Case C Function Settings Copy Auto Collate Tam ura Tam ura Auto Recognize Original Orientation Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Select Color Settings for Copy Tam ura Tam ura Tam...

Page 208: ...ormation Case A Case B Case C Set Destination Change Default Display of Address Book Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Address Book PIN Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Manage Address Book Access Numbers Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Include Pswd When Exporting Address Book Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Register LDAP Server Tam ura Tam ura Auto Search When Using LDAP Server Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Register Edit LDAP Search Cond...

Page 209: ...pair is exported in the PKCS 12 format Main Menu Settings Setting Information Case A Case B Case C Main Menu Settings Setting File Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura T 2 113 T 2 114 T 2 115 T 2 116 T 2 117 Favorite Settings Setting Information Case A Case B Case C Function Settings Copy Register Edit Favorite Settings Tam ura Tam ura Change Default Settings Tam ura Tam ura Register Options Shortcuts Tam ura ...

Page 210: ... Space are imported they are imported as authentication user management settings Personal Setting Information Setting Information Case A Case B Case C MEAP User Setting Information Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Password information used for encrypted PDF Tam ura Tam ura User name and password information used for SMTP Authentication Tam ura Tam ura User name and password used for LDAP server authenticat...

Page 211: ...FS Y Yes No No MD OFS M Yes No No MD OFS C Yes No No MD OFS K Yes No No HD OFS Y Yes No No HD OFS M Yes No No HD OFS C Yes No No HD OFS K Yes No No PL OFS Y Yes No No PL OFS M Yes No No PL OFS C Yes No No Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL OFS K Yes No No PM OFS Y Yes No No PM OFS M Yes No No PM OFS C Yes No No PM OFS K Yes No No PH OFS Y Yes No No PH OFS...

Page 212: ...P2 Yes No No FEED ADJ REG SPD Yes No No FEED ADJ LP FEED3 Yes No No FEED ADJ LP DUP3 Yes No No FEED ADJ LP MULT3 Yes No No HV TR TR PPR1 Yes No No HV TR TR PPR2 Yes No No HV TR TR PPR3 Yes No No HV TR TR PPR4 Yes No No HV TR TR PPR5 Yes No No Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR6 Yes No No HV TR TR PPR7 Yes No No HV TR TR PPR8 Yes No No HV TR TR ENV1 Ye...

Page 213: ... H M Yes No No REG V M Yes No No REG HS M Yes No No MAG H Yes No No MAG V Yes No No DRM SPD1 Yes No No LS H YL Yes No No LS H YC Yes No No LS H YR Yes No No LS H ML Yes No No Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS H MC Yes No No LS H MR Yes No No LS H KL Yes No No LS H KC Yes No No LS H KR Yes No No LS V YL Yes No No LS V YC Yes No No LS V YR Yes No No LS V...

Page 214: ...es UI PRINT Yes Yes Yes UI RSCAN Yes Yes Yes UI WEB Yes Yes Yes TNR WARN Yes Yes Yes HPFL DSP Yes Yes Yes RMT CNSL Yes Yes Yes UI SBOX Yes Yes Yes UI MEM Yes Yes Yes UI NAVI Yes Yes Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW ITB DSP Yes Yes No UI CUSTM Yes Yes Yes CLN SEL Yes Yes No USER DSP Yes Yes Yes SDTM DSP Yes Yes Yes WT WARN Yes Yes Yes DF DSP Yes Yes ...

Page 215: ... IMG DEV DRM IDL Yes Yes Yes AUTO DH Yes No No PCHINT V Yes No No DELV THY Yes No No DELV THC Yes No No DELV THM Yes No No DELV THK Yes No No ADJ VPP Yes No No ADJ BLNK Yes No No DMX OF Y Yes No No DMX OF M Yes No No Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DMX OF C Yes No No DMX OF K Yes No No ADJ VPPN Yes No No TNNEWCNT Yes No No TNENDCNT Yes No No D PTN Yes N...

Page 216: ...XPN Yes Yes Yes STS PORT Yes Yes Yes CMD PORT Yes Yes Yes NS CMD5 Yes Yes Yes NS GSAPI Yes Yes Yes NS NTLM Yes Yes Yes NS PLNWS Yes Yes Yes NS PLN Yes Yes Yes NS LGN Yes Yes Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER OPTION NETWORK MEAP PN Yes Yes Yes CHNG STS Yes Yes Yes CHNG CMD Yes Yes Yes MEAP SSL Yes Yes Yes LPD PORT Yes Yes Yes WUEV SW Yes Yes Yes WUEV INT Yes Yes Yes ...

Page 217: ... Yes Yes Yes COUNTER8 Yes Yes Yes 2C CT SW Yes Yes Yes LDAP SW Yes Yes Yes FROM OF Yes Yes Yes DOM ADD Yes Yes Yes FILE OF Yes Yes Yes MAIL OF Yes Yes Yes IFAX OF Yes Yes Yes LDAP DEF Yes Yes Yes Initial screen Large Middle Small Case A Case B Case C COPIER OPTION USER FREE DSP Yes No No TNRB SW Yes Yes Yes CLR TIM Yes Yes Yes HDCR DSW Yes Yes Yes BWCL DSP Yes Yes Yes SCALL SW Yes Yes Yes SCALLCMP...

Page 218: ...o No SDL ALM Yes No No INSTP F1 Yes No No INSTP R1 Yes No No THN STCL Yes No No FR ST PS Yes Yes No FR STP X Yes No No FR STP Y Yes No No RBLT PRS Yes No No MSTP 2P Yes No No INF ALG1 Yes No No INF ALG2 Yes No No CENT ALG Yes No No OPTION MD SPRTN Yes No No STCR DWN Yes No No PRCS SP3 Yes No No NSRT STC Yes No No THN TRSW Yes No No SWGUP SW Yes No No MSTP TMG Yes Yes Yes DWCL BND Yes No No FR ST P...

Page 219: ...3 3 Periodical Service Periodical Service List of periodically replacement parts consumable parts and locations for cleaning Cleaning Parts ...

Page 220: ...0 000 images Replace DRBL 1 DV UNT Y p 4 56 12 Developing Unit M FM1 B265 1 240 000 images Replace DRBL 1 DV UNT M 13 Developing Unit C FM1 B266 1 240 000 images Replace DRBL 1 DV UNT C 14 Developing Unit Bk FM1 B267 1 240 000 images Replace DRBL 1 DV UNT K 15 Fixing Unit FM1 A613 100V FM1 D276 120V FM1 D277 230V 1 180 000 pages Replace DRBL 1 FX UNIT 35 0076 ALARM 3 p 4 79 16 Fixing Film Unit FM1...

Page 221: ...ee paper moistened with alcohol As needed 3 Pre transfer Guide 4 Secondary Transfer Roller Guide Assembly 5 Registration Roller 6 Registration Assembly 7 Vertical Path Roller 8 Duplex Merging Roller 9 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 2 10 Reverse Vertical Path Roller 1 11 Duplex Roller 1 12 Duplex Roller 2 13 First Delivery Roller 14 Second Delivery Roller 15 Third Delivery Roller 16 Rowel Block Assem...

Page 222: ...y Disassembly Assembly Preface Parts replacement procedures list List of Parts List of Connectors External Cover Interior System Controller System Laser Exposure System Image Formation System Fixing System Pickup Feed System ...

Page 223: ...iginal locations 5 Do not run the printer with any parts removed as a general rule 6 Ground yourself by touching the metal part of the printer before handling the PCB to reduce the possibility of damage caused by static electricity 7 When you replace the part that the rating plate or the product code label is attached be sure to remove the rating plate or the product code label and put it to the n...

Page 224: ...Category Description Image Formation System Removing the Drum Unit Removing the Developing Unit Installing the Developing Unit Removing the Waste Toner Container Removing the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller Removing the ITB Unit Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Removing the ITB Removing the Primary Transfer Roller Y M C BK Removing the Patch Sensor Unit Removing the Waste Toner Drive Unit Removing ...

Page 225: ...over 2 Reader Left Retaining Cover 3 Reader Hinge Lower Cover Left 4 Reader PCB Cover 5 Reader Glass Support Cover 6 Reader Rear Cover 7 Reader Hinge Lower Cover Right 8 Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box 9 Reader Front Cover Small 10 Reader Right Retaining Cover 11 Reader Front Cover 12 Right Front Upper Cover 13 Front Cover Upper 14 Front Cover 15 Cassette 1 Front Cover 16 Cassette 2 Front Cover 1...

Page 226: ...pper 8 Reverse Trailing Edge Guide 9 Reverse Guide Cover 10 Inner Right Cover 11 Inner Blind Cover 12 Fan Holder 13 Front Inner Upper Cover 14 Drum Unit Retaining Cover Bk 15 Drum Unit Retaining Cover C 16 Drum Unit Retaining Cover M 17 Drum Unit Retaining Cover Y 18 Front Inner Lower Cover F 4 4 T 4 4 Host Machine Control Panel 8 6 7 5 2 1 3 4 No Parts Name No Parts Name 1 Control Panel Upper Cov...

Page 227: ...ver Rear Upper 3 Blind Cover Rear 4 Cover Rear Upper 5 Right Cover Assembly Rear Lower 6 Cover Rear Lower 7 Power Supply Cord Cover 8 Environment Heater Switch Cover 9 Connector Cover 10 Handle Cover 11 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Side Guide Plate 12 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Sub Tray 13 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Tray Assembly 14 Right Cover Lower 15 Right Door Lower 16 Right Cover Front Lower 17 Ri...

Page 228: ...M07 Cassette 1 2 Pickup Motor M08 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor Main Drive Unit M09 Fixing Motor Fixing Drive Unit M10 Developing Motor Main Drive Unit M11 Duplex Reverse Motor Reverse Duplexing Drive Unit M12 Registration Motor M13 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M14 Duplex Merging Motor M17 Waste Toner Feed Motor M30 Reverce Motor M31 Second Delivery Motor Second Deliv...

Page 229: ...ng Cylinder Clutch Y Main Drive Unit CL02 Developing Cylinder Clutch M Main Drive Unit CL03 Developing Cylinder Clutch C Main Drive Unit CL04 Developing Cylinder Clutch Bk Main Drive Unit F 4 9 T 4 9 Solenoid SL06 SL02 No Parts Name Main Unit Reference SL02 Registration Shutter Solenoid Registration Patch Sensor Unit SL06 Duplex Reverse Solenoid First Delivery F 4 10 T 4 10 ...

Page 230: ...e Tray Pickup Unit PS26 Toner supply sensor Y Bottle Drive Unit YM PS27 Toner supply sensor M Bottle Drive Unit YM PS28 Toner supply sensor C Bottle Drive Unit CBk PS29 Toner supply sensor Bk Bottle Drive Unit CBk PS30 Multi purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit PS31 Multi purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2 Multi purpose Tray Pickup Unit PS32 Multi purpose Tray HP Senso...

Page 231: ...r Registration Unit PS24 Cassette 2 Vertical Path Sensor Cassette 2 Pickup Unit PS33 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement HP Sensor Main Drive Unit PS51 Second delivery Reverse sensor Second Third Delivery PS52 Third delivery sensor Third Delivery Unit PS53 Second Delivery Paper Full Sensor Second Third Delivery UN25 Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear Registration Patch Sensor Unit UN26 Registra...

Page 232: ...p 4 49 UN12 Pre exposure LED Driver PCB UN13 Pre exposure LED PCB Y Pre exposure LED Unit UN14 Pre exposure LED PCB M Pre exposure LED Unit UN15 Pre exposure LED PCB C Pre exposure LED Unit UN16 Pre exposure LED PCB Bk Pre exposure LED Unit F 4 15 T 4 15 UN10 UN29 UN31 UN08 UN09 No Parts Name Main Unit Reference UN08 Y M Laser Driver PCB Laser Scanner Unit UN09 C Bk Laser Driver PCB Laser Scanner ...

Page 233: ...sembly Assembly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors List of Connectors J1006 J1007 J1121 J313 J110 J321 J17 J40 J29 J23 J28 J13 J15 J14 J12 J26 J32 J25 J20 J22 J18 J6 J7 J3 J5 J24 J21 J10 J8 F 4 17 ...

Page 234: ... 13 4 13 Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors J1 J2 J1001 J1004 J1003 J1002 J1008 J1007 J3 J41 J1 J2 J2 J4 J314 J30 J27 J16 J304 J6 J7 J4 J2 J2 J8 J5 J403 J4 F 4 18 ...

Page 235: ...Assembly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors J121 J134 J182 J100 J115 J302 J323 J315 J322 J302 J1001 J199 J190 J1002 J1115 J721 J1338M J1114 J1195 J1189D J1342 J1008 J305 J306 J301 J1336 J1336 J301 F 4 19 ...

Page 236: ...15 Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors J1340 J1260 J1251 J1261 J1199 J1033 J124 J132 J136 J1027 J1028 J1030 J1031 J1029 J1026 J1045 J1220 J1221 J1222 J1339 J1063 F 4 20 ...

Page 237: ... 4 4 16 4 16 Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors J801 J203 J202 J204 J201 J206 J401 J19 J502 J501 J111 J112 J114 J125 J113 J1180 J1120 J1119 J1025 J1122 F 4 21 ...

Page 238: ...4 4 4 17 4 17 Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors J1335 J1066 J1022 J1146 J1050 J1051 J130 J1052 J1053 J1333 J120 J128 J130 F 4 22 ...

Page 239: ...4 4 4 18 4 18 Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors J135 J133 J127 J1177 J1107 J1260L J1334 J1059 J1060 J1061 J1062 J1213 J1057 J1058 J1011 F 4 23 ...

Page 240: ...4 4 4 19 4 19 Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors J1046 J1113 J1112 J701 J702 J1341 J1110 J1111 J123 J122 J1168 J1019 J1017 J1079 J1012 J1250 F 4 24 ...

Page 241: ...sassembly Assembly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors J1167 J1337 J1338L J1169 J1201 J1054 J1190 J1103 J1202 J1203 J1204 J1205 J1189 J129 J131 J139 J1423 J1424 J1425 J1426 J138 J137 J126 F 4 25 ...

Page 242: ...4 4 4 21 4 21 Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors J5001 J5011 J5014 J5015 J5007 J5006 J5003 J5009 J2101 J305 J5010 J5013 J35 J38 J36 J33 J37 F 4 26 ...

Page 243: ...bly List of Connectors Disassembly Assembly List of Connectors J1108 J126 J303 J603 J601 J606 J602 J604 J1252 J1134 J1135 J1181 J1138 J1139 J1137 J1136 J1124 J1125 J1127 J1128 J1123 J1126 J1262 J1196 J1263 J605 J610 J606 J1129 F 4 27 ...

Page 244: ...Sensor Unit Rear J120 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1145 J1066 UN25 Registration Patch Sensor Unit Front J120 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1145 J1146 J1146 SL02 Registration Shutter Solenoid J121 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1001B J1096 J1189 PS10 Fixingt Delivery Sensor J121 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1001B J1195 UN31 Fixing Fuse PCB J121 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1001A J721 J721 TH01 Fixing Thermistors J122 UN04 DC ...

Page 245: ...terlock Switch 2 J131 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1201 M08 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor J131 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1202 J1202 CL01 Developing Cylinder Clutch Y J131 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1203 J1203 CL02 Developing Cylinder Clutch M J131 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1204 J1204 CL03 Developing Cylinder Clutch C J131 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1205 J1205 CL04 Developing Cylinder Clutch Bk J131...

Page 246: ...37 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1420 UN12 Pre exposure LED Driver PCB J1421 UN12 Pre exposure LED Driver PCB J1422 J1423 UN16 LED PCB Bk J1421 UN12 Pre exposure LED Driver PCB J1422 J1424 UN15 LED PCB C J1421 UN12 Pre exposure LED Driver PCB J1422 J1425 UN14 LED PCB M J1421 UN12 Pre exposure LED Driver PCB J1422 J1426 UN13 LED PCB Y J134 UN04 DC Controller PCB J1342 J1342 FM03 Motor Fan J190 UN04 DC Co...

Page 247: ...nsor INCH Reader J36 UN05 Main Controller PCB J5015 STM1 Scanner Motor Reader J33 UN05 Main Controller PCB J2101 Scanner Unit Reader J28 UN05 Main Controller PCB Image Analysis Board J24 UN05 Main Controller PCB Counter PCB J17 UN05 Main Controller PCB Voice Operation Voice Guidance J15 UN05 Main Controller PCB Control I F J10 UN05 Main Controller PCB UN61 Flash PCB J8 UN05 Main Controller PCB UN6...

Page 248: ...t Door 1 Open the Right Door 2 Lift up the Right Door 1 slide the Right Door Guide Left 2 and Right Door Guide Right 3 in the direction in the figure below to fully open it 1 3 2 F 4 28 Moving the Lever Assembly to the following position changes the open close status of the host machine s Right Cover A Position that opens the host machine s Right Cover B Position that fully opens the host machine ...

Page 249: ... Open the Front Door 2 Remove the Front Door 1 while lifting it up slightly and pushing the claw 2 1 Claw 2 2 Bosses 3 1 3 1x 2 F 4 29 Removing the Front Fan Preparation 1 Open the Front Door Refer to page 4 28 2 Fully open the Right Door Refer to page 4 27 3 Remove the Fixing Unit Refer to page 4 79 4 Remove the Drum Unit Bk Procedure 1 Remove the Control Panel Lower Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2 Claws 3 ...

Page 250: ...or System Removing the Front Fan Procedure Remove the Delivery Outlet Side Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 2 Pull out the cassette 1 and open the Cassette Side Cover 2 2 Screws 3 2x 3 1 2 F 4 31 F 4 32 3 Remove the connector 1 of the Front Fan 1x 1 4 Open the Front Fan 1 and remove the connector 2 2 Screws 3 1 Claws 4 2x 3 1 4 1x 1x 2 F 4 33 F 4 34 ...

Page 251: ...em Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Procedure 5 Remove the Front Fan 1 F 4 35 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan Preparation 1 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 2 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 3 Remove the Left Cover Upper 4 Remove the Left Cover Assembly Rear Procedure 1 Remove the screw 1 and disconnect the connector 2 1 Screw 1 2 Connectors 2 1x 1x 1 2 F 4 36 ...

Page 252: ...s 2 while pushing down the boss 1 with a screwdriver and remove the Power Supply Cooling Fan 3 1 Boss 1 2 Hooks 2 1 2 3 Points to Note at Installation Be sure to insert the A part of the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 into the guide 1 in the cover to install the fan 1 2 A F 4 38 F 4 37 Removing the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB Preparation 1 Remove the Cover Rear Upper Procedure 1 Remove the groun...

Page 253: ...PCB 1 from the guide 2 Screws 2 5 Claws 3 4 Bosses 4 Old Type 5x 4 4 3 1 3 3 3 New Type 5x 4 4 3 1 2x 3 3 3 2 CAUTION Since there is a connector connected to the back side of the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB do not remove it abruptly F 4 40 F 4 41 3 Remove the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB 1 1 Connector 2 1x 1 2 NOTE When installing the PCB be sure to fit it with the 4 claws on the bottom...

Page 254: ...an Preparation 1 Remove the Cassette Connector Cover 2 Remove the Cover Rear Lower Procedure 1 Release the 2 claws 1 and pull the tab 2 to remove the Motor Fan 3 1 Connector 4 3 Claws 1 4 1 3 2 1 1x 3x F 4 43 Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Cassette Connector Cover 2 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 3 Remove the Motor Fan Refer to page 4 33 Procedure 1 Remove the Wir...

Page 255: ...bly Assembly External Cover Interior System Removing the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit Procedure 2 Disconnect the connectors 1 Clamp 2 12 Connectors 1 1 Clamp 2 12x 1 3 Free the harness 1 from the hole 2 in the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit 1 2 F 4 45 F 4 46 4 Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit 1 2 Screws 2 1 2 2x F 4 47 ...

Page 256: ...emove the Cassette Connector Cover 2 Remove the Cover Rear Lower 3 Remove the Motor Fan Refer to page 4 33 4 Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit Refer to page 4 33 Procedure 1 Remove the 2 Support Plates 1 and the grounding 2 3 Screws 3 1 Wire Saddle 4 1 3 4 2 3 3x 1x F 4 48 2 Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB 1 from the guide 8 Claws 2 6 Bosses 3 8x 3 2 2 3 1 3 3 Disconnect the ...

Page 257: ...ternal Cover Interior System Removing the Control Panel Procedure NOTE Be sure that the Contact Spring is in the correct position F 4 51 Removing the Control Panel Preparation 1 Open the Front Door 2 Fully open the Right Door Procedure 1 Remove the Control Panel Lower Cover 1 2 Screws 2 2 Claws 3 1 3 2 2 1x 1x 2x F 4 52 F 4 53 ...

Page 258: ...em Removing the Control Panel Procedure 2 Remove the Delivery Outlet Side Cover 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 3 Remove the Control Panel Hinge Cover Right 1 1 Claw 2 1 Boss 3 2 Protrusions 4 1x 1 4 3 2 F 4 54 F 4 55 4 Remove the Control Panel Lower Cover Small 1 4 Claws 2 4x 1 2 2 5 Remove the Control Panel Cover Rear 1 1 Screw 2 2 Bosses 3 1x 2 3 1 F 4 56 F 4 57 ...

Page 259: ...dure 6 Remove the Control Panel Hinge Inner Cover 1 5 Protrusions 2 2 2 1 2 2 3 Points to Note at Installation When installing the Control Panel Hinge Inner Cover be sure to follow the order shown below F 4 59 F 4 58 7 Disconnect the Control Panel Cable 1 and the Power Supply Cable 2 1x 2x 1 2 8 Remove the Control Panel 1 5 Screws 2 1 Hinge Shaft 3 1 Boss 4 4x 4 3 2 1 2 2 F 4 60 F 4 61 ...

Page 260: ...oints to Note at Installation When installing the Hinge Shaft be sure to align the shape of the shaft hole with that of the shaft s leading edge F 4 62 Removing the Control Panel CPU PCB Preparation 1 Open the Front Door 2 Fully open the Right Door 3 Remove the Control Panel Procedure 1 Pull out the Control Panel Pen 1 and remove the Control Panel Lower Cover 2 4 Screws 3 1 Claw 4 4x 3 3 4 2 1 F 4...

Page 261: ...l Panel Key Switch PCB Procedure 2 Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB 1 1 Reuse Band 2 1 Wire Saddle 3 2 Connectors 4 2 Flat Cables 5 4 Screws 6 4x 2x 4x 5 1 5 6 4 6 2 3 F 4 65 Removing the Touch Panel LCD Unit and the Control Panel Key Switch PCB Preparation 1 Open the Front Door 2 Fully open the Right Door 3 Remove the Control Panel 4 Remove the Control Panel CPU PCB Procedure 1 Remove the Control...

Page 262: ...the Control Panel Key Switch PCB Procedure Disassembly Assembly External Cover Interior System Removing the Touch Panel LCD Unit and the Control Panel Key Switch PCB Procedure 2 Remove the Touch Panel LCD Unit 1 and the Control Panel Key Switch PCB 2 6 Bosses 3 2 Claws 4 1 Hook 5 3 4 1 3 3 4 2 5 1x F 4 68 ...

Page 263: ...ing the Reader Scanner Unit Procedure 1 Open the ADF Unit 2 Remove the Glass Retainer Right 1 and then remove the Copy Board Glass 2 2 Screws 3 2x 1 2 3 F 4 69 F 4 70 CAUTION Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts 1 of the Reader Scanner Unit If you have touched the grease be careful not to put it to other parts 1 F 4 71 3 Move the belt 1 and move the Reader Scanner Unit 2 to the cut off of the Re...

Page 264: ...er that remove the belt 1 from the Reader Scanner Unit 2 Loosen 1 2 CAUTION Holding the Reader Scanner Unit Be sure to hold both edges 1 Do not touch the PCB 2 and the mirror 3 1 1 1 2 3 F 4 74 F 4 73 5 Place paper 1 on the Stream Reading Glass and place the Reader Scanner Unit 2 on it with its up side down 1 2 6 Disconnect the Flat Cable 1 with Protection Sheet 2 from the Reader Scanner Unit 1 Co...

Page 265: ...level data barcode value in the copyboard glass right upper of the standard white plate Lv COPIER ADJUST CCD 1 100 RG 100 GB 2 Adjust the shading position Lv COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL 1 RDSHDPOS 3 Adjust the stream reading position Lv COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL 1 STRD POS 4 Perform white level adjustment 4 1 Set A3 or LDR paper in the copyboard glass CAUTION If white level is adjusted in the small widt...

Page 266: ...DF Unit 2 Remove the Glass Retainer Right 1 and then remove the Copy Board Glass 2 2 Screws 3 2x 1 2 3 CAUTION Grease is applied on the 2 Rail Shafts 1 of the Reader Scanner Unit If you have touched the grease be careful not to put it to other parts 1 F 4 80 F 4 79 3 Move the belt 1 and move the Reader Scanner Unit 2 to the cut off of the Reader Unit 2 2 1 3 4 Loosen the screw to release the tensi...

Page 267: ...anner Mirror Procedure 6 Place the Reader Scanner Unit 1 as shown in the figure below 1 7 Remove the LED Unit 1 1 Connector 2 1x 1 2 F 4 83 F 4 84 8 Return the Scanner Unit to its original position 9 Clean the mirror 1 with lint free paper The following 4 mirrors can be cleaned 1 2 1 NOTE The rearmost mirror 2 cannot be cleaned However it is a dustproof mirror so there is no need to clean it F 4 8...

Page 268: ...Settings Yes 1 Yes 9 Settings Registration Preferences Except for Paper Type Management Settings Yes 9 Yes 10 Adjustment Maintenance Yes 9 Yes 10 Function Settings Except for Printer Custom Settings Forwarding Settings Yes 9 Yes 10 Set Destination Except for Address List Yes 9 Yes 10 Management Settings Except for Address List Yes 9 Yes 10 User authentication information used for local device auth...

Page 269: ... or Export 2 Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings User Management Authentication Management User Management 3 Remote UI Quick Menu Export 4 Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management Back Up or Restore 5 Remote UI Service Management Service 6 Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings Device Management Save Audit Log Audit log that was exported cann...

Page 270: ...ting registering the data While referring to the list which was printed before replacement reset register the data 5 When the user generates and adds the encryption key certificate and or CA certificate request the user to generate them again NOTE When configuring the number of cassettes for the 1 cassette model for China as 1 cassette Lv 2 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CST MDL 1 F 4 87 Removing the Main C...

Page 271: ...ddles 1 When a fax is installed 2x 1 3 Free the harness 1 3 when a fax is installed from the hole 2 and free the Flexible Cable 3 from the guide 4 1 3 4 2 2 1x F 4 89 F 4 90 4 Remove the Flexible Cable guide 1 1 Bosses 2 1 Hooks 3 1 3 2 5 Remove the Main Controller PCB 1 1 Screws 2 2 Screws 3 to loosen 2 1 2x 2 6 Replace parts from an old PCB to a new PCB Memorey PCB FLASH PCB TPM PCB F 4 91 F 4 9...

Page 272: ... mode setting values by P PRINT before execution Lv 1 COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT 2 Remove the Connector Cover 1 3 Remove the Cover Rear Lower Procedure 1 Remove the DC Controller PCB 1 26 Connectors 2 6 Screws 3 6x 26x 2 3 3 1 2 F 4 93 Actions after Replacement 1 Restore of the Service Mode data Lv 2 COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES ACTIVE is displayed at execution and then OK is displayed abou...

Page 273: ...dure Removing the Fax Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Cover Rear Upper 2 Remove the Controller Cover Refer to page 4 47 Procedure 1 Disconnect the connector when the 2 line Fax is installed 1x 2 Remove the 2 Wire Saddles 1 2x 1 F 4 94 F 4 95 3 Disconnect the 2 connectors 1 1 2x 4 Remove the Fax Unit 2 Hooks 1 2 Bosses 2 2 Screws 2x 2 1 1 2 F 4 96 F 4 97 ...

Page 274: ...he Cassette 1 2 Open the Waste Toner Cover 3 Remove the Left Cover Upper Procedure 1 Grasp and lift up the handle 1 to release the protrusion 2 and pull out the Laser Scanner Unit 3 to the position in the following figure 1 Clamp 4 2 Screws 5 2x 1 2 3 4 5 1x F 4 98 2 Turn over the Protection Sheet 1 and free the harness 2 from the Harness Guide 3 1 Connector 4 3 Disconnect the Flexible Cable 5 1x ...

Page 275: ...s adjustment Actions after Replacement 1 Execute Auto Correct Color Mismatch 2 If the degree of color displacement differs between the center and the edge execute copy ratio correction and distortion correction as needed Cleaning the Dustproof Glass 1 Open the Front Door 2 Remove the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool 1 1 3 Insert the Dustproof Glass Cleaning Tool 1 into the hole 2 and clean the glass ...

Page 276: ...eep sleep mode the Primary Transfer Roller will not be disengaged When removing the Drum Unit Bk be sure to do so after returning the machine to a standby state 1 Open the Front Door 2 Open the Drum Unit Retaining Cover 1 1 F 4 104 3 Pinch the light blue A part and pull out the Drum Unit 1 CAUTION Since there is a risk of damaging the Photosensitive Drum do not touch the surface Be sure to block l...

Page 277: ...OFF while in Deep sleep mode the Primary Transfer Roller will not be disengaged When removing the Drum Unit Bk be sure to do so after returning the machine to a standby state 1 Remove the Drum Unit Refer to page 4 55 Procedure 1 Remove the screw 1 1 Screw 1 1 1x F 4 106 2 Pull out the Developing Unit 1 to the position in the figure below disconnect the connector 2 and hook it on the groove in the ...

Page 278: ...ngly up and down approx 10 times with its angle unchanged 2 ｘ10 60 1 2 CAUTION If the Developing Unit is installed with toner uneven in the container the screw may be broken and E020 E021 may occur F 4 109 F 4 110 3 Remove the seal 1 from the supply mouth 1 4 Check that the connector is hooked on the groove in the cover If it is not hooked the connector may get stuck when inserting the Developing ...

Page 279: ... in the cover and connect it to the Developing Unit 1 7 Slowly insert the Developing Unit up to the position where it is to be secured with a screw CAUTION If you insert it abruptly toner may scatter on the rear side inside the machine when the shutter opens Old Type F 4 113 F 4 114 New Type 8 Secure the Developing Unit with the screw while holding it down 1 Screw 1 1 9 Install the Drum Unit F 4 1...

Page 280: ...rformed and the parts counters are cleared NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 DV UNT Y M C K 2 Check COPIER ADJUST DENS D Y M C K LVL and write down on the service label of the Front Door 3 Check COPIER ADJUST DENS CONT Y M C K and write down on the service label of the Front Door 4 Execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Removing the Waste Toner Container 1 Open the Cassette 1 2 Open the ...

Page 281: ...oller 1 Open the Right Door 2 Remove the Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 1 1 F 4 117 Points to Note at Installation Remove the Protection Sheet 1 from the new Secondary Transfer Outer Roller after installation 1 Pull the tape 2 on the Protection Sheet 1 in the direction of the arrow to remove the sheet 1 2 F 4 118 F 4 119 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 2TR ROLL It is also cleared at the ...

Page 282: ...d perform the work after returning the machine to the standby state 1 Fully open the Right Door Refer to page 4 27 Procedure 1 Pull the lever 1 to unlock it grasp the handle A on the left and right and pull the ITB Unit 2 to the position in the figure below while shifting it to the left side 1 A 2 F 4 120 2 Switch your grip to the handle B on the left and right and pull out the ITB Unit 1 B 1 Poin...

Page 283: ...TR ROLK TR ROLC are also cleared at the same time After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch After Removing the ITB Unit Cleaning the Registration Patch Sensor Unit 1 Open the shutter 1 and clean the Patch Sensor 2 using the blower 3 After cleaning check that there is no soiling caused by toner on the surface of the sensor If the soiling cannot be remo...

Page 284: ... Light Guide 1 Clean the upper surface 1 of the Light Guide of each color Drum Unit using the blower 2 1 2 F 4 123 Removing the ITB Cleaning Blade Preparation 1 Open the Right Door 2 Fully open the Right Door Refer to page 4 27 3 Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 61 Procedure 1 Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Retainer 1 2 Screws 2 2 Gears 3 1 Clasp 4 Used when removing the ITB 1 2 3 3 4 2x F 4 124...

Page 285: ...red at the same time when TR UNIT is cleared After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch F 4 125 Removing the ITB Preparation 1 Open the Right Door 2 Fully open the Right Door Refer to page 4 27 3 Pull out the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 61 4 Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Refer to page 4 63 Procedure 1 Push the Tension Guide 1 to loosen the tension of the ...

Page 286: ...TB Unit and secure it by using the ITB Cleaning Blade 1 as a base 1 Boss 2 1 2 3 Remove the screw 1 and remove the Left Handle 3 by rotating it while lifting up the boss 2 1 Screw 1 1 Boss 2 1x 1 3 2 F 4 127 F 4 128 CAUTION When installing removing the Left Handle align the holes 1 and 2 in a straight line 1 2 Be careful not to lose the Parallel Pin 1 1 F 4 129 F 4 130 ...

Page 287: ...sembly Image Formation System Removing the ITB Procedure 4 Remove the Tension Roller Retainer 1 2 Hooks 2 1 2 Note When installing the Tension Roller Retainer do so in the order of 1 spring 2 rib and 3 Shaft Hole F 4 132 F 4 131 5 Remove the ITB Tension Roller 1 1 6 Remove the ITB 1 1 F 4 133 F 4 134 ...

Page 288: ...t placed on the Tension Roller F 4 135 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR BLT It is also cleared at the same time when TR UNIT is cleared After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch Removing the Primary Transfer Roller Y M C BK Preparation 1 Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 61 2 Remove the ITB Cleaning Blade Refer to page 4 63 3 Remove the I...

Page 289: ...NTER DRBL 1 TR ROLK Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 TR ROLC It is also cleared at the same time when TR UNIT is cleared After installation execute Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust Auto Correct Color Mismatch F 4 138 Removing the Patch Sensor Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Registration Guide Unit Refer to page 4 101 2 Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 61 Procedure 1 Remove the Harness Guide 1...

Page 290: ...tment see the alarm log to check that 10 0006 10 0007 has not occurred When an alarm occurs perform a remedy according to the instruction of the alarm F 4 140 Removing the Waste Toner Drive Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Motor Fan Refer to page 4 33 2 Remove the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit Refer to page 4 33 3 Remove the Secondary Transfer High Voltage PCB Refer to page 4 35 4 Remove the Waste To...

Page 291: ...otor Preparation 1 Remove the Right Door Refer to page 4 87 2 Remove the Registration Guide Unit Refer to page 4 101 3 Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit Refer to page 4 92 4 Remove the Motor Fan Refer to page 4 33 Procedure 1 Remove the white member 1 using a flat blade screwdriver 1 Claw 2 1x 1 2 F 4 142 2 Remove the Duplex Merging Motor 1 and the Registration Motor 2 2 Connectors 3 4 Screws 4 4x...

Page 292: ...ure Removing the Main Drive Unit Preparation 1 Open the Front Cover 2 Pull out the Drum Unit by approx 3 cm 3 Pull out the Developing Unit by approx 3 cm 30mm 4 Remove the Rear Upper Cover 5 Remove the Rear Lower Cover F 4 144 Procedure 1 Remove the DC Controller PCB together with the Support Plate 3 Screws 1 27 Connectors 2 10 Wire Saddles 3 3x 10x 27x 3 3 2 1 1 2 1 F 4 145 ...

Page 293: ...pply Assembly and disconnect the connector 2 of the Power Supply Cooling Fan 2 Wire Saddles 3 2x 1x 3 1 2 3 Remove the Main Drive Unit 9 Screws 1 9x 2 1 2 2 F 4 146 F 4 147 Procedure for Removing the Main Drive Unit and Points to Note コントローラーボックス後側板 Rear Plate フック Hook Controller Box 低圧電源ユニット Low Voltage Power Suppy Unit メイン駆動ユニット Main Drive Unit 1 Release the hook of the Main Drive Unit from ...

Page 294: ...ing the Main Drive Unit Procedure 2 Pull out the Main Drive Unit approx 10 mm horizontally 3 Remove it from the lower direction so as not to hit the Low Voltage Power Supply Unit F 4 150 F 4 151 CAUTION Use caution to pull out the Main Drive Unit fully and horizontally otherwise the coupling may be caught on the Rear Plate and be damaged F 4 152 ...

Page 295: ...from the Harness Guide 2 2 Wire Saddles 3 3x 3 2 1 2 Remove the 4 Pre exposure LEDs 1 1 Claw 2 4x 2 1 F 4 153 F 4 154 3 Remove the guide 1 of the Pre exposure LED 1 1 Adjustment after Replacement The following procedure can also be performed in Service Mode SITUATION Parts Replacement Adjustment at replacement of the Pre exposure LED Unit 1 Light up the Cleaning Pre exposure LED and check that the...

Page 296: ...ge 4 61 3 Pull out the Cassette 1 4 Open the Waste Toner Cover 5 Open the Front Door 6 Remove the Toner Bottle 7 Remove the Left Cover Upper 8 Remove the First Delivery Tray CAUTION Be sure to place a sheet of paper during the work to prevent the drum from being exposed to light and damaged F 4 156 Procedure 1 Free the harness 1 of the Toner Bottle Mount Y and C only 1 Connector 2 2 Wire Saddles 3...

Page 297: ...age Formation System Remove the Bottle Drive Unit YM CBk Procedure 2 2 Remove the Toner Bottle Mount Upper 1 BK 2 Hooks 2 1 Boss 3 1 2 2 3 F 4 159 3 Remove the Toner Bottle Mount Lower 1 2 Claws 2 2 Hooks 3 2 2 1 3 2 2x 4 1 Free the harness of the Bottle Drive Unit YM 5 Connectors 1 1 Wire Saddles 2 1x 5x 1 1 2 F 4 160 F 4 161 ...

Page 298: ...Bk Procedure Disassembly Assembly Image Formation System Remove the Bottle Drive Unit YM CBk Procedure 4 2 Free the harness of the Bottle Drive Unit CK 4 Connectors 1 4x 1 1 5 Remove the link F 4 162 F 4 163 6 Remove the Bottle Drive Unit 1 2 Bosses 2 5 Hooks 3 2 2 3 3 3 2 2 1 3 3 3 3 F 4 164 ...

Page 299: ...be sure to pay attention to the following points 1 Be sure to remove the Anti vibration Sheet before installing the unit 2 Be sure to pull out the slider 1 forward 1 Push the Lock Lever inside 2 Pull out the slider 3 Pull the Lock Lever 1 1 F 4 165 F 4 166 Points to Note at Installation 3 After the slider has been moved check that the 2 bosses are stopped at the correct position When the slider is...

Page 300: ... Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX UNIT The parts counter of the Fixing Unit is automatically cleared when a new Fixing Unit is detected When a fixing error E001 E002 E003 occurs be sure to turn ON the power after closing the Right Door When FX UNIT is cleared FX LW RL FX UP FR FX LW BS are also cleared at the same time F 4 168 Removing the Fixing Film Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Fixing Uni...

Page 301: ...rocedure 2 Remove the Fixing Left Cover 1 2 Claws 2 1 2 2x NOTE If the claw of the Fixing Left Cover is damaged 1 can be secured by tightening the screws 1x F 4 171 F 4 170 3 Rotate the Fixing Unit 180 degrees 4 Remove the Fixing Right Cover 1 2 Claws 2 CAUTION Since there are connectors connected inside do not remove them abruptly 2 1 2x F 4 172 F 4 173 ...

Page 302: ...mbly Fixing System Removing the Fixing Film Unit Procedure 5 Disconnect the 3 connectors 1 3 Connectors 1 1 1 3x 6 Rotate the Fixing Unit 90 degrees F 4 174 F 4 175 7 Open the left and right Fixing Pressure Levers 1 1 8 Remove the 2 springs 1 from the left and right Fixing Pressure Levers 1 F 4 176 F 4 177 ...

Page 303: ...pen the Fixing Lower Cover 1 1 F 4 178 F 4 179 11 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide 2 and remove the Fixing Film Unit 3 1 2 3 1x Points to Note at Installation When installing the Fixing Film Unit 1 be sure to align the grooves on the right and left with the rail 3 1 2 2 3 3 F 4 181 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX UP FR It is also cleared at the same time when FX UNIT is cleare...

Page 304: ...xing Pressure Roller Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support Preparation 1 Remove the Fixing Unit Refer to page 4 79 2 Remove the Fixing Film Unit Refer to page 4 79 Procedure 1 Open the guide 1 1 F 4 182 2 Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller 1 1 3 Remove the Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support 1 1 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX LW RL Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX LW BS It is als...

Page 305: ...ly open the Right Door Refer to page 4 27 2 Remove the Fixing Unit Refer to page 4 79 3 Remove the ITB Unit Refer to page 4 61 4 Remove the Right Upper Rear Cover 5 Remove the Second Delivery Unit Refer to page 4 91 6 Remove the First Delivery Unit Refer to page 4 90 Procedure 1 Remove the Air Flow Duct 1 2 Claws 2 2x 2 1 F 4 185 2 Remove the Fixing Drive Assembly 1 3 Screws 2 1 Connector 4 1x 1x ...

Page 306: ...Cassette 1 2 Cassette 3 4 Option Preparation 1 Open the Right Door Lower or the Cassette Right Door Assembly Cassette 1 2 Right Door Lower Cassette 3 4 Cassette Right Door Assembly 2 Pull out the cassette each paper source Procedure 1 Move the Pickup Guide Holder 1 1 F 4 187 2 Pull out the Pickup Roller 2 Feed Roller 3 Separation Roller 4 while holding down the claw 1 3 Claws 1 1 3 2 4 1x NOTE Par...

Page 307: ...ray Pickup Roller Cover 1 1 Claw 2 2 Bosses 3 3 1 2 1x 3 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller 1 and the Feed Roller 2 1 2 F 4 189 F 4 190 4 Remove the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller Guide 1 1 Hook 2 2 Claws 3 on the host machine side 2 1 3 2x 5 Raise the Multi purpose Tray Separation Roller 1 with the shaft as the center and pull it out from the shaft 1 1 NOTE Parts Counter COPIER COU...

Page 308: ...position 2 When installing the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller Cover be sure to do so after aligning 1 with the boss hole and 2 with the holes F 4 193 F 4 194 Removing the Right Door Unit Preparation 1 Pull out the Cassette 1 2 2 Open the Right Door Right Door Lower Cassette Right Door Assembly 3 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the screw on the left side of the Cover Rear Lower 5 Remov...

Page 309: ...re 2 from the Wire Fixation Member 1 and pass it through the hole A in the Right Door 1 2 2 2 A A 3 Close the Multi purpose Tray Pickup Tray F 4 196 F 4 197 4 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide 2 1 Connector 3 1 Clamp 4 2x 1x 1 2 3 4 5 Fully open the Right Door 6 Remove the Link Gear 1 1 Screw 2 2 Bosses 3 CAUTION Be sure to perform work while supporting the Right Door with your thigh and t...

Page 310: ...d the outside at the position A of the Stopper Rail and opening the door 7 2 Remove the link by pulling the Lever Assembly Rear 2 toward the outside at the position A of the Stopper Rail and opening the door 1 2 A A NOTE Bend the A part when removing the Lever Assembly The figure shows the Stopper Rail on the rear side Pull the Lever Assembly Front Rear toward the outside at the position B B A F 4...

Page 311: ...or 2 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 3 Remove the Fixing Unit Refer to page 4 79 4 Remove the Second Delivery Unit Refer to page 4 91 Procedure 1 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide 2 1 Connector 3 1 Wire Saddle 4 2 3 1 4 2x 1x F 4 203 2 Remove the First Delivery Unit 1 1 Screw 2 2 Bosses 3 1x 1 2 3 Points to Note at Removing If you pull the right side of the First Delivery Unit out too fa...

Page 312: ...ration 1 Open the Right Door 2 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper Procedure 1 Pull out the Second Delivery Unit slightly 4 Screws 1 Wire Saddle 4x 1x F 4 206 2 Pull out the Second Delivery Unit slightly and disconnect the connector 1 Connector 1 1x 1x 3 Remove the Second Delivery Unit Points to Note at Removing If you pull the right side of the Second Delivery Unit out too far the 2 bosses may be d...

Page 313: ...Delivery Unit 1 Open the Right Door 2 Fully open the Right Door Refer to page 4 27 3 Remove the Third Delivery Unit 3 Bosses 3 Protrusions 5 Screws 5x F 4 209 Removing the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit Preparation 1 Remove the Right Door Unit Refer to page 4 87 Procedure 1 Remove the Right Door Link Left 1 and Right Door Link Right 2 1 2 2 Remove the Connector Cover 1 1 Claw 2 1 Hook 3 2 3 1 1x F 4 210 F...

Page 314: ...Cassette 1 Pickup Unit Procedure 3 Free the harness 1 from the Harness Guide 2 1 Connector 3 2 3 1 1x 1x 4 Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit 1 4 Screws 2 4x 1 2 2 2 F 4 212 F 4 213 Note at Removal Installation Remove the Cassette 1 Pickup Unit 2 while pulling it out along the A part of the Right Door Shaft Support Block 1 on the left side 1 A 2 F 4 214 ...

Page 315: ...it Preparation 1 1 Pull out the Cassette 1 2 2 Open the Right Door Right Door Lower Cassette Right Door Assembly 3 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the screw on the left side of the Cover Rear Lower 5 Remove the Right Cover Assembly Rear Lower 6 Remove the Right Cover Front Lower and Right Door Lower 6 3 5 4 F 4 215 Procedure 1 Remove the Cassette 2 Pickup Unit 1 1 Connector 2 4 Screws 3...

Page 316: ...Assembly 3 Remove the Right Cover Rear Upper 4 Remove the screw of the Cover Rear Lower 5 Remove the Right Cover Assembly Rear Lower 6 Remove the Right Cover Front Lower and Right Door Lower 7 Remove the Cassette Cover Right Front 8 Remove the Cassette Cover Right Rear and remove the Cassette Right Door 9 Remove the Cassette Right Cover Lower 7 9 8 6 3 5 4 F 4 217 Procedure 1 Release the connector...

Page 317: ... Path Roller Procedure 3 Remove the Pickup Unit 1 4 Screws 2 1 1 2 2 4x F 4 220 Removing the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller Preparation 1 Fully open the Right Door Refer to page 4 27 2 Remove the Registration Guide Unit Refer to page 4 101 Procedure 1 Remove the Guide Plate 1 2 Screws 2 Use a stubby screwdriver 2x 1 2 2 Orient the tabs of the 2 bushings 1 upward 1 F 4 221 F 4 222 ...

Page 318: ...h Roller Procedure 3 Lift up the left bushing 1 and remove the Shaft Spacer 2 CAUTION Use caution as the Shaft Spacer drops easily at this time 1 2 Points to Note at Installation Be sure to push the Shaft Spacer from above all the way down F 4 224 F 4 223 4 Remove the Vertical Path Roller 1 CAUTION Take care not to drop the 2 bushings 2 1 2 5 Remove the 2 bushings 1 1 F 4 225 F 4 226 ...

Page 319: ... sure to replace the Cassette 1 Vertical Path Roller at the same time as the Registration Roller This is because the speed control varies as the roller wears Parts Counter COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 VP FD RL VP FD RL is also cleared at the same time when R DOOR is cleared Removing the Registration Roller Preparation 1 Fully open the Right Door Refer to page 4 27 Procedure 1 Remove the Secondary Transfe...

Page 320: ...er Procedure Disassembly Assembly Pickup Feed System Removing the Registration Roller Procedure 3 Remove the Secondary Transfer Guide Unit 2 Protrusion 2 2 1 4 Remove the gear 1 1 Claw 2 1x 2 1 F 4 230 F 4 231 5 Remove the E ring 1 1 6 Remove the Registration Roller 1 1 F 4 232 F 4 233 ...

Page 321: ... Guide Unit to the springs 4 3 3 4 4 2 1 F 4 235 F 4 234 Points to Note at Installation 3 Fit the 2 protrusions 1 on the front side into the holes 2 of the guide CAUTION Be sure that the rib A is inside the Secondary Transfer Guide Unit 3 3 4 4 2 1 4 Fit the protrusion 2 while bending the guide 1 on the rear side 2 1 F 4 236 F 4 237 NOTE Be sure to replace the Registration Roller at the same time ...

Page 322: ... to page 4 27 3 Remove the Front Door Refer to page 4 28 Procedure 1 Remove the right side of the Registration Guide Unit 1 1 Screw 2 1x 1 2 2 Insert a Phillips screwdriver into the hole 1 and then release the claw 3 from the Registration Guide Unit 2 1 Claw 3 2 1 1x 3 F 4 238 F 4 239 3 Release the 2 protrusions and pull out the Registration Guide Unit 2 CAUION Be careful of the connector on the b...

Page 323: ...02 4 102 Disassembly Assembly Pickup Feed System Removing the Registration Guide Unit Procedure Disassembly Assembly Pickup Feed System Removing the Registration Guide Unit Procedure New Type 1x 1 2 1x F 4 242 ...

Page 324: ...5 5 Adjustment Adjustment Pickup Feed System Document Exposure System Actions after Replacement ...

Page 325: ...ER TEST PG TYPE 5 COPIER TEST PG COLOR K 1 COPIER TEST PG COLOR Y M C 0 COPIER TEST PG 2 SIDE 1 COPIER TEST PG PG PICK each of the paper sources CAUTION At 2 sided printing paper is output with the 1st side up and 2nd side down When checking the leading edge margin on the 1st side check the up side of paper and check the margin on the rear side with respect to the feed direction CAUTION If the mar...

Page 326: ...y 0 5mm Scale Teeth 5 Tighten the Fixation Screw NOTE If you are concemed with the difference in level of the cassettes after mechanical adjustment adjust it by loosening the 2 screws on the side F 5 4 F 5 3 6 Pull out the next upper cassette and check that the Adjustment Plate is correctly pushed against the frame CAUTION If the Adjustment Plate is not correctly pushed against the frame image can...

Page 327: ...e REG DUP2 1 2 speed back side As the value is changed by 1 the leading edge margin is changed by 0 1 mm 2 Left edge ADJ C1 C2 C3 C4 MF Front side ADJ C1RE C2RE C3RE C4RE MFRE Back side As the value is changed by 1 the left edge margin is changed by 0 1 mm 3 If the service mode has been changed write the new adjustment value on the service label Reference Standard value Leading edge 4 0 1 5 1 0 mm...

Page 328: ... backup makes the work easier when replacing the Scanner Unit etc When clearing the Reader related RAM data Points to note before replacing the Reader Controller PCB Be sure to output the P PRINT Level1 COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT Back up the service mode setting values related to Main Controller PCB Excluding the case where service mode cannot be executed due to the Main Controller PCB not ope...

Page 329: ... for Address List Yes 9 Yes 10 User authentication information used for local device authentication of UA User Authentication Yes 2 Yes 9 Printer Settings Yes 1 Yes 10 Set Paper Information Yes 1 Yes 9 T 5 3 Backup target data Backup Method User Service DCM Power OFF excluding DCM Setting items for each menu in Main Menu Copy Scan and Send Fax Scan and Store Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Fav...

Page 330: ...ime is automatically backed up to the Flash PCB When a HDD is replaced with a new one the setting value is automatically inherited from the Flash PCB at the time of HDD formatting This function can be used from MN CON V06 xx Main controller PCB Item Specification Replacing method Removing the Main Controller PCB page 4 49 Operation at Replacement Replace parts from an old PCB to a new PCB Memorey ...

Page 331: ...cation Replacing method Removing the Patch Sensor Unit 4 68 explaination 1 Enter the service mode values written on the label included in the package COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA F COPIER ADJUST DENS PALPHA R 2 Execute auto gradation adjustment 3 After executing auto gradation adjustment see the alarm log to check that 10 0006 10 0007 has not occurred When an alarm occurs perform a remedy according t...

Page 332: ...he white level data barcode value in the copyboard glass right upper of the standard white plate LV COPIER ADJUST CCD 1 W PLT X W PLT Y W PLT Z W PLT X W PLT Y W PLT Z 2 Perform white level adjustment 2 1 Set A3 or LDR paper in the copyboard glass CAUTION If white level is adjusted in the small width paper there is possibility that it will not adjust If low whiteness paper is used the adjustment m...

Page 333: ...r in the copyboard glass CAUTION If white level is adjusted in the small width paper there is possibility that it will not adjust If low whiteness paper is used the adjustment may result in failure 4 2 Execute white level adjustment at copyboard reading Lv COPIER FUNCTION CCD 1 DF WLVL1 4 3 Remove the paper from copyboard glass set it in the DADF document pickup tray 4 4 Execute white level adjust...

Page 334: ...6 6 Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Initial Check Test Print Controller Self Diagnosis Debug Log Version Upgrade Backup Restore ...

Page 335: ...l ventilated and the fl oor keeps the machine level 6 The machine s power plug remains connected to the power outlet Checking the Paper 7 The paper is of a recommended type 8 The paper is not moist Try paper fresh out of package Checking the Placement of Paper 9 Check the cassette and the manual feed tray to see if the paper is not in excess of a specifi c level 10 If a transparency is used check ...

Page 336: ...ght Lines Color displacement 0 Normal copy print 1to3 For R D 4 16 gradations Yes Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 5 Full half tone Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 6 Grid Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 7 For R D 8 Half tone Patch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 For R D 10 MCYBk horizontal stripes sub scanning direction Yes Yes Yes Main controller PCB 11 For R D 12 MCYBk 64 gradation Yes Yes Yes Main...

Page 337: ... density at front rear Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 16 density gradation is properly reproduced Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Fogging Check that fogging occurs on white image area only Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit White line Check that white line does not appear on entire image Failure of Drum Unit Uneven density at front rea...

Page 338: ...ause Transfer failure Check that the transfer failure does not appear on entire image Failure of ITB scratch dirt Failure of Primary Transfer Roller scratch dirt Failure of Secondary Transfer Roller scratch dirt Black line color line Check that black line does not appear on entire image Scratch on Photosensitive Drum Dirt on Primary Charging Roller White line Check that white line does not appear ...

Page 339: ...nsity Check that uneven density does not appear on solid area of each color Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Failure of developer in Drum Unit Failure of Primary Transfer Roller Black line color line Check that black line color line does not appear on solid area of each color Scratch on Photosensitive Drum Dirt on Primary Charging Roller White line Check that white line does not appear on solid area ...

Page 340: ...ent Check items Check method Assumed cause Uneven density Check that uneven density does not appear on solid area of each color Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Failure of developer in Drum Unit Failure of Primary Transfer Roller Black line color line Check that black line color line does not appear on solid area of each color Scratch on Photosensitive Drum Dirt on Primary Charging Roller White line ...

Page 341: ...hecking the gradations of YMCBk single color at one time Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Fogging Check that fogging appears on white image area only Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit White line Check that there is no white line on entire image Failure of Drum ...

Page 342: ...r mainly checking the gray balance gradations of YMCBk singe color and fogging Check item Check method Assumed cause Gradation Check that 64 gradations density is properly reproduced in each color Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Fogging Check that fogging appears on white image area only Failure of Drum Unit Failure of Laser Scanner Unit Gray balance Check that density is even i...

Page 343: ...e 6 10 Forcible stop of paper feed Refer to page 6 11 Not able to remove the ITB Unit due to the Primary Transfer Roller disengagement failure Location ITB Unit Cause Condition If unexpected situations coincide with unexpected conditions disengagement failure of the Primary Transfer Roller may occur As a result the ITB Unit may not be able to be removed from the host machine Field Remedy Follow th...

Page 344: ...val the job is automatically recovered Display of standard jam code indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified position When a job in which the paper does not pass the specified stop position is executed the setting to forcibly stop the paper becomes disabled Unfixed toner may be attached depending on the stop position Use caution when handling it F 6 8 How to use Use this func...

Page 345: ...s 31 Pre fixing 2nd side 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 32 Post fixing 1st side Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 33 Post fixing 2nd side 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 40 Second Delivery 1st side 2 Yes Yes 41 Second Delivery 2nd side 1 2 Yes Yes 70 Reverse position 1 1 4 Yes Yes Yes 71 Reverse position 2 1 3 Yes Yes Yes 72 Duplex standby position 1 Yes Yes Yes 99 Pre fixing 1st side when checking the image Yes 1 Paper is stoppe...

Page 346: ... possible When the LED of the Control Panel main power is not lit check the connection of cables such as UI Cable F 6 10 Check the lighting of the LED on the Main Controller Lighting check of the LED on the Main Controller PCB Flash PCB LED1 lights up Yes No 1 Check for poor connection of the connector on the FLASH PCB 2 Replace the FLASH PCB Is the machine started normally Normal operation Yes No...

Page 347: ... 1 Control Panel CPU PCB 2 Main Controller PCB1 3 12V Connector of the Control Panel 4 Control Panel Unit No Yes Yes Assumed failure location 1 Control Panel Unit 2 12V Connector of the Control Panel 3 Main Controller PCB1 No 1 2 3 2 F 6 12 Startup Failure Analysis Policy Startup Failure Analysis Policy describes troubleshooting related to Execution Flow for Control Panel Startup Failure for the L...

Page 348: ... Main Power Supply SW J4 Main Controller PCB J25 J321 DC 3 3V DC 3 3V J301 AC Low Voltage Power Supply PCB Control Panel 12 V power supply route Main Controller PCB Power ON signal J20 Control Panel Control Panel control signal Low Voltage Power Supply PCB 12V Power Supply line 12V Power Supply line J25 J321 J313 J314 J1118 F 6 14 F 6 15 1 Turn OFF the Main Power Supply Switch 2 Disconnect and the...

Page 349: ...ly or the Main Controller Status Check Check item Item Check item Location 1 Control Panel LED 2 Low voltage Power Supply PCB 3 3V There are 2 types of PCB Identify the installed PCB with reference to the photo below and check 3 3V TYPE1 FB601 3 31v TYPE1 RJ90 3 31v Item Check item Location 3 Main Controller PCB 3 3V CP226 3 31v 4 Main Controller PCB 12V LED is ON 12V 5 Is 12 V detected at the con...

Page 350: ...n the Power Supply or the Main Controller Status Check Troubleshooting Startup System Failure Diagnosis Flow A Identifying the Cause Between the Power Supply or the Main Controller Status Check Item Check item Location 6 Is 12 V detected at the connector J20 of the Main Controller PCB 11 95v T 6 11 ...

Page 351: ...Numeric Keypad PCB Yes Yes No No Yes No Press the Volume key several times to start work with the operation sound heard Yes No Yes No Replace the Low voltage Power Supply PCB 1 Is 12V supplied to the Control Panel 3 Is the Control Panel displayed after replacing the Control Panel CPU PCB Is the operation sound heard when the Touch Panel is pressed 2 Is 12V supplied to the Low Voltage Power Suply P...

Page 352: ...while pressing the numeric keys 2 and 4 simultaneously 2 Keep pressing the numeric keys until the following screen appears on the Control Panel approx 20 seconds F 6 18 F 6 19 Remedy after the check 1 Perform the following checks if the failure diagnosis does not start If it starts proceed to the next step Install the system software Download by 2 8 startup Replace the SATA Flash Replace the Main ...

Page 353: ...y PCB or TPM mounted in the Main Controller PCB PCBs and units diagnosed by each tool are as follow Tool PCBs Units Controller System Error Diagnosis Tool Main Controller PCB TPM PCB FLASH PCB Memory PCB HDD T 6 13 Overview Error diagnosis tools are installed in this machine and stored in the locations shown below Reader HDD Option All night Non all night Power Supply DC Controler PCB Main Control...

Page 354: ... supply LED on the Control Panel light up Execute basic check ExecuteControllerSystem Error Diagnosis Tool Take an action appropriatefor the error Code Is display a judgmentresult of OK or NG The errorlocations are identified according to the ControllerSystem Error Diagnosis Table Basic Check Items Check if the Power Supply Plug is disconnected Check if the Connection Cable between the Main Contro...

Page 355: ...f the installed module can be checked using service mode COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BCT Controller System Error Diagnosis Boot Method 1 Turn ON the Main Power Supply Switch while pressing the numeric keys 2 and 4 simultaneously 2 Keep pressing the numeric keys for approx 20 seconds until the following screen appears on the Control Panel F 6 23 Diagnosis Time Diagnosis is completed in approx 3 minutes ...

Page 356: ...2 On Board Check an SM bus error in I2C on the Main Controller PCB Main Controller PCB 1 Replace the Main Controller PCB SN 3 SM BUS MN Clock Gen Check an SM bus error in SDRAM inside on the Main Controller PCB Main Controller PCB 1 Replace the Main Controller PCB SN 5 PCI Configuration Check a PCI Configuration error in the Main Controller PCB Main Controller PCB 1 Replace the Main Controller PCB...

Page 357: ... result CheckResult is CAUTION recommend the backup of user data If the result Exec SN 100 HDD HEALTHCHECK is NG replace the HDD T 6 14 Display HDD S M A R T S M A R T Check 05 Reallcated Sectors Count 000000000000 C5 Current Pending Sector Count 000000000000 C6 Uncorrectable Sector Count 000000000000 Read Performance Check 90 8MB s CheckResult NORMAL Exec SN 100 HDD HEALTH CHECK OK Exec SCENARIO ...

Page 358: ... lit on the LED PCB The firstly blinked green LED ChA or ChB in a high speed tells the Master HDD which is accessed firstly The green LED not lit on a channel tells the location of Backup HDD Restrictions Controller System Error Diagnosis Regarding the diagnosis for the test names SN 1 2 5 12 if an error occurs in the diagnosis under the test names this diagnosis tool will not boot When no PCBs ar...

Page 359: ...F and then ON the power Saving to a USB Device with Counter Key Numeric Key page 6 32 Ask the user to make a note of the date and time when the problem occurred and the procedure If the user notifies the log has been saved collect the log The DEBUG PCB ASS Y Board may need to be installed to obtain the log depending on the problem refer to Flow of Determining the Procedure for Obtaining Logs NOTE ...

Page 360: ...he Control Panel to be locked Necessary 1 Install the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS Y Board 2 Turn OFF and then ON the power immediately after the Control Panel is locked 3 Save the log in the HDD after startup 4 Collect the log from the HDD with SST etc Case C Problem related to the sleep mode Necessary 1 Install the DEBUG SRAM PCB ASS Y Board 2 After the problem occurs turn OFF and then ON the power if nec...

Page 361: ...to save the logs to a USB device or PC with SST ver 4 75 or later Operation Destination Collected logs Manual log Automatic log Continuous log 1 Operation in download mode USB device Yes 1 Yes Yes 2 Operation from SST PC Yes 1 Yes Yes 3 Operation with Counter key numeric key Without USB device Machine HDD Yes 2 4 Operation with Counter key numeric key With USB device USB device Yes Yes 5 Operation...

Page 362: ...ded to the file name are the date and time when the log is transferred When the machine is not correctly running the time may not become the local time In this case it becomes the Greenwich mean time F 6 29 F 6 30 Saving to a USB Device Using Download Mode Overview Start the machine in download mode and save collect the log archive saved in the auto save area to the USB device NOTE This operation ...

Page 363: ...ect the logs F 6 32 Saving to a PC Using SST The following shows a method to collect a log by connecting a PC with SST Ver 4 75 or later running to the machine Preconditions The log is stored in the machine by holding down the counter 1 2 3 or the automatic log collection function A PC with SST running is connected to the machine and this device is at download mode by starting it with the 2 and 8 ...

Page 364: ...nk option items for data to upload When the file name is longer than the frame it displays that it is a log in the comment column just below It is displayed as log in the figure below NOTE The log is not stored when You cancel it before pushing the Start button It is deleted from this device F 6 34 F 6 35 4 Select Upload Log file and LogList file The list of logs stored in the log file of the mach...

Page 365: ...ch module is saved to the auto save area If a USB device has been connected to the machine in advance the log archives saved in the auto save area are saved to the USB device Since this operation can obtain the log archives current as of the operation logs useful for analysis can be obtained by performing this operation while reproducing the problem Module Module Module This machine This machine M...

Page 366: ...re written to the USB device by performing the above operation the next time the USB device is connected However the extensions of the file names differ between when directly writing to the USB device and when writing to the USB device after saving in the machine hard disk Log files collected to a USB device are deleted from the machine F 6 41 Status Display on the Control Panel During a log colle...

Page 367: ...ng fails 4 Go to the screen for removing memory media and remove the USB device NOTE When there is any debug log file that has been automatically saved in the sublog storage space send it to the USB memory device as well T 6 22 Service Mode Relating to Debug Logs Overview This machine has menus related to debug logs Level2 COPIER Function DBG LOG Changing Debug Log Settings LOG TRIG Overview LOG T...

Page 368: ...e is set The displayed setting is not changed simply by changing the setting or pressing DEFAULT It is necessary to exit the DBG LOG screen once by pressing the Reset key etc and then display it again after performing these operations T 6 23 Example of Auto Saving To experience a log collection operation the following shows a executing example This is a log collection example when a jam occurs in ...

Page 369: ...umber of stored logs however it is necessary to delete logs by LOG DEL when using HIT STS to see whether the log is collected or not after changing the log storage trigger setting Because the HIT STS status always shows OK as long as there is a log that has been stored Collecting the Log of Key Operations Overview The key operation log function collects key operation log of the user to identify th...

Page 370: ...for log collection Network Packet Capture Overview This function enables the network packet data sent and received by the device to be collected captured to the hard disk without using a special device It enables network related trouble to be efficiently resolved Use SST or a USB device to collect the network packets saved to the hard disk CAUTION The network packet capture function may fail to co...

Page 371: ... Function To enable this function set 1 in the following service mode Level2 COPIER Test NET CAP OVERWRIT NOTE When the HDD space becomes full after starting the capture the oldest file is deleted and the captured data continues to be saved therefore it is necessary to set 1 Overwrite in advance The following shows the machine behavior when the HDD space reaches full When the overwriting setting i...

Page 372: ...the TCP header and IP header The data part includes the actual data Enabling this function discards the actual payload data and extracts only the data from the header part which has the following effects Can be used when customer data is not allowed to be extracted Can be used in an environment where traffic is highly overloaded Header part Data part Discarded part F 6 43 Setting the Filter Functi...

Page 373: ...ING Packets are being captured STOP Packet capturing is stopped HDDFULL The maximum amount of 1 GB of packets has been captured NOTE Packets are not collected if the machine enters deep sleep mode while capturing However capturing is resumed when the machine recovers from sleep mode F 6 44 Disabling This Function Overview Disable this function when the required network packets have been obtained P...

Page 374: ...llecting data the setting of encryption function is disabled and files in clear text format encrypted format can be always collected level 2 Copier Test NET CAP ENCDATA Collecting Network Capture Data 1 Start the machine by download mode and connect SST 2 Select a model to connect and click the Single and the Start buttons 3 Click the Upload Data button F 6 46 4 When a list of packet files stored ...

Page 375: ...e network packet capture data that has been stored in the machine using a USB memory device Make sure to store the system software of the machine to connect to in the USB device to connect with Collect the network packet capture data 1 Connect the USB memory device to the USB port 2 Enter download mode When the machine recognizes the USB memory device download Menu USB appears on the Control Panel...

Page 376: ...rk packet capture files are stored on the USB memory device Two types of files are collected a file in clear text format xxx cap and a file in encrypted format xxx can 2 Use free software to analyze the collected network packet capture data in clear text format xxx cap NOTE When the analysis work fails send the file in encrypted format xxx can to the Support Dept of your sales company Captured dat...

Page 377: ...st Machine SafeCont iAC 3330 SYSTEM Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura StdCont Language Module LANGUAGE Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Printer Controller DCON Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura FAX Board Boot Program G3CCB Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura FAX Board Main Program G3CCM Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Staple Saddle Finisher U1 Finisher Controller FIN_U1 FIN_CON Tam ura Tam ura Tam ura Saddle Stitcher Controller SDL_CON Tam ura T...

Page 378: ... Upgrading with CDS For details on the procedure refer to Updater Checking the Version Execute the following service mode to confirm whether the processing was completed correctly COPIER DISPLAY VERSION Automatic Update In addition to the system software for the Main Controller the machine retains the system software for DCON and all options in its Main Controller Therefore when options are instal...

Page 379: ... Mode Upgrading with SST operates with the following two modes Operation Mode Features and Purpose Assist mode Automatically identities the connecting model Automatically searches the new version of the system software for the connecting model Automatically downloads the system software in the combination of the versions which the operation has been checked Single mode Does not identify the connec...

Page 380: ...address 172 16 1 100 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 When the PC with SST installed is connected to this machine change the PC network address as follows IP address 172 16 1 160 Subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Default gateway arbitrary CAUTION Ensure that the PC is disconnected from the network when you change the PC network settings Alternatively use the cross cable to connect to this machine 1 Connect this ...

Page 381: ...PC is disconnected from the network To check the settings ensure that this machine is turned ON and connect the PC and this machine with the cross cable F 6 60 Upgrading the System Software Assist mode 1 Connect this machine and the PC with SST installed 2 Turn ON the machine power and execute the following service mode to enter download mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD 3 Start SST and click t...

Page 382: ...is no choice but to select Overwrite all versions when the checkbox for SYSTEM is not selected 5 Click the Next button 6 Click the OK button 7 Enter service mode to check the version of the system software NOTE When an error occurs during version upgrade the machine is normally started with the previous version of the system software the version before the upgrade After version upgrade be sure to ...

Page 383: ...l versions Regardless of version upgrade or downgrade all versions of the system software are downloaded without the confirmation message Skip the existing versions and confirm whether to download the downgraded versions can be selected when the checkbox for SYSTEM is selected There is no choice but to select Overwrite all versions when the checkbox for SYSTEM is not selected F 6 66 NOTE Checking ...

Page 384: ... system software in the machine and the USB device and downloads only system software that is a new version Update w Confirmation Compares the versions of the system software in the machine and the USB device and downloads system software if it is a new version You can select whether to download the software if it is an old version Update Overwrite all Downloads all the system software in the USB ...

Page 385: ...ce is inserted 4 Select the Series F 6 70 F 6 71 5 Select the version to register After selecting the version click Confirm button NOTE Only one version can be registered at once In addition a single system software can be registered 6 When the firmware to be written is displayed click Start NOTE In the case of using USB1 1 it takes approx up to 10 minutes for writing In the case of using USB2 0 i...

Page 386: ... can be used as well 5 When the machine recognizes the USB memory storage device the following menu is displayed on the control panel Root Menu USB 1 Select Version 4 Clear Format 5 Backup Restore 8 Download File Reset Start shutdown sequence Do not turn OFF power without executing the shutdown sequence CAUTION Depending on the manufacturer or the model this machine may fail to recognize the USB m...

Page 387: ...tatus is displayed on the control panel FirmDownload 0 FirmBackup StdCont Dcon CCM ACC1 CCB ACC2 RCON ACC3 TSP Reboot SafeCont Updating software Do not turn OFF the main power Mise a jour du ligiciel Ne mettez pas le peripherique hors tension Software wird aktualisiert Schalten Sie das Gerat nicht AUS ソフトウェアの更新中です電源を切らないでください Writing to the system software area on the FLASH PCB is started once do...

Page 388: ...and then remove the USB memory storage device 7 Enter service mode to check the version F 6 80 3 Upgrade Overwrite all Regardless of the system software version in the machine all the system software in the USB memory storage device is downloaded NOTE All firmware update may take up to 25 minutes To reduce downtime we recommend using Update Auto under normal condition COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLO...

Page 389: ...C Return to Select Version Reset Start shutdown sequence Do not turn OFF power without executing the shutdown sequence F 6 82 F 6 83 6 以下の画面が表示されるので実行するバージョンアップ方法を選択し 0 を押して実行する Backupless mode has been selected Please press Update mode 1 Update Auto 2 Update w Confirmation 3 Update Overrite all C Return to Main Menu 1 has been selected Execute OK 0 CANCEL Any other keys During the download proce...

Page 390: ...ownload via SST Update via SST Firmware acquisition With connection to external network Without connection to external network 1 Schedules for UGW linked distribution are maintained on CDS F 6 86 Preparation The following preparations are required to upgrade with CDS Installation Method Setting Sales Company s HQ Network Settings Enabling UGW Link Enabling Update Firmware Button Enabling Manual Up...

Page 391: ...r the firmware distribution setting enabling automatic firmware download and update NOTE To contacts registered for E mail notification on UGW the E mail is sent from UGW upon completing firmware update F 6 87 UGW linked Download Remote Distribution Update See the figure below for the operational flow of UGW linked download STEP 2 Update using Updater STEP 1 Scheduling via UGW Scheduling via UGW T...

Page 392: ...date Firmware button 3 Press Apply Firmware button F 6 90 F 6 91 4 Confirm the downloaded firmware and press Yes button 5 The firmware is applied to the device The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied 6 When the device is restarted confirm the version of the firmware NOTE To contacts registered for E mail notification on UGW the E mail is sent from UGW upon c...

Page 393: ...pdater STEP 1 Download using Updater Download using Updater 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Press Update Firmware button F 6 93 F 6 94 F 6 95 3 Confirm the firmware to be updated in either of the following 2 ways To update to the official edition press Confirm Applicable Firmware button and go to Step 6 To update to the individual response edition press Special Firmware and go to Step 5...

Page 394: ...pecify the date within 7 days and time The firmware is downloaded on the specified date and time Enter the date and time using the numeric keypad in the format of yyyy mm dd hh mm ss Timing to Apply Press either Auto or Manual button For firmware versions with no remote update permission Auto cannot be selected in Timing to Apply Auto The firmware is applied automatically upon firmware downloaded ...

Page 395: ... Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to Now and Auto respectively Firmware is downloaded and updated automatically to the device The device is automatically restarted upon update completed Now STEP 1 is successfully completed F 6 100 F 6 101 When Distribution Time and Timing to Apply of Distribution Setting are set to Now and Manual respectively Confirm the firmware and press ...

Page 396: ...o Apply is set to Auto in Distribution Setting in STEP 1 the firmware is updated automatically Only when Timing to Apply is set to Manual follow the steps below to update the firmware 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Press Update Firmware button F 6 104 F 6 105 3 Press Apply Firmware button 4 Confirm the downloaded firmware and press Yes button 5 The firmware is applied to the device The...

Page 397: ...aded firmware 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Press Update Firmware button 3 Press Apply Firmware button F 6 108 F 6 109 4 Confirm the downloaded firmware and press Yes button 5 The firmware is applied to the device The device is automatically restarted when the firmware is successfully applied 6 When the device is restarted confirm the version of the firmware Deleting Firmware Distribu...

Page 398: ...uled Delivery button 4 Confirm the contents of the distribution schedule and press Yes button 5 Confirm the result of deletion shown on the screen and press OK button F 6 112 F 6 113 Deleting Downloaded Firmware This section describes how to delete the downloaded firmware using Updater 1 Press Updater in the service mode menu 2 Press Update Firmware button 3 Press Delete Firmware button F 6 114 F ...

Page 399: ...ion No 1 Symptom I can t find the firmware to be updated using Updater Cause The setting of Sales Company s HQ is wrong Action Use the following service mode to set the correct region COP IER FUNCTION INSTALL CDS CTL Cause The version currently in use is not available for update Action Download the release note from CDS separately to upgrade to the version available for update Cause You try to dow...

Page 400: ...e firmware cannot be downloaded Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware Cause At the scheduled distribution date and time the firmware registered was not found on CDS Action Distribution should be rescheduled for the firmware Cause After distribution is scheduled device is updated to other version of firmware via SST Status of the firmware in the device is changed Action Distribution s...

Page 401: ...he section of Setting Log Level under Various Setting System Management Operations of Updater of Chapter 2 Technology of this manual for more details of changing Log Level 4 If the value of CDS MEAP or CDS FIRM was changed in the service mode return to the original value and then restart the device to enable this setting Obtaining the log files is completed ...

Page 402: ...cause an error occurred with the file server Check the network At the time of file download Communication error to the delivery server occurred Check if the network environment is correct to solve the cause of the error occurrence If the network environment of the device is correct obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of ...

Page 403: ...ain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company again 10 Delivery Server Connect OK File Server Retrieve Failed Error Code xxxx Delivery Server Connect OK File Server Retrieve Failed Error Code XXXX Due to no return of data for the communication test time out in HTTP communica...

Page 404: ...was disconnected during notice of version information Re connect the network cable and re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Failed to send notice of version information since the main power was turned OFF and then ON during the sen...

Page 405: ...ing of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company During the download all space in the storage disk was occupied DiskFull After adding vacant space of the storage disk re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company At the end o...

Page 406: ...ain body Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Manual update main screen Automatic update main screen Updated version was different from the ordered version Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs unde...

Page 407: ...of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support Div of the sales company Immediate download Update Firmware screen At the time of immediate download turned OFF and then ON the power of device main body Re execute the job If it recurs obtain the log etc Refer to Debug Logs under Version Upgrade via CDS Version Upgrade of Chapter 6 Troubleshooting of this manual and contact Support D...

Page 408: ...of a number of eight digits hexadecimal number displayed on the UI shown below 84014206 Code Value Contents The ﬁrst digit Error ﬁeld 8 Error The second digit Operator 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Not deﬁned CDS server Updater UGW Service person IT administrator User Scheduled Update The 3rd 4th digits Method category xx Method The 5th digit Category code 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 A B F Category code Operation I O Device ...

Page 409: ...In the case of an error message with a check mark on the Network column of Cause of error in the error code list try the remedy shown below Execute the operation again Perform a communication test on the Touch Panel of the device Check the status of the network equipment disconnection of the LAN cable etc Check the network settings of the device Check that there is no restriction on the network en...

Page 410: ...4 Service person 5 User Contact the support department of the sales company Attach information on the time of occurrence and the serial number of the device Tam ura Tam ura 81 0004 No applicable delivery information exists Tam ura 81 0005 Error in the system settings Tam ura Operation 81 1001 In the case of 81 0001 except follows Inconsistency between the current firmware component in the data ent...

Page 411: ...r of the device Tam ura 81 100F The delivery code is other than Distributing Firmware distribution Tam ura 81 1010 The delivery status is New Waiting to Distribute Distributing Applying Finished Failed Search the applicable firmware again and perform distribution of the firmware Tam ura 810B1010 An update start notification was sent to CDS with an invalid status The CDS server failed to receive th...

Page 412: ...department of the sales company Attach the Sublog and update log of the device Tam ura 1102 Failed to process use end Tam ura 1103 Time out during restart of readiness preparation Tam ura 1104 Session time out excluding after application inquiry after issuing delivery ID Start the operation again from the beginning Tam ura 1105 CDS URL is not set Set CDS URL Tam ura 1106 Another job existed immedi...

Page 413: ...e Specify the distribution settings again making sure that the distribution server maintenance time and the scheduled update time do not overlap In the case of distribution executed by specifying the date and time Specify the distribution settings again making sure that the firmware version of device at the time when the distribution settings are specified and the version at the time immediately b...

Page 414: ...ate log of the device Tam ura Tam ura 6102 No response from eRDS Tam ura Tam ura 6103 No notice of start from the eRDS Tam ura Tam ura 6104 Error of socket reading Tam ura Tam ura 6105 Socket communication time out Tam ura Tam ura Other internal codes 71XX An error by using invalid API Contact the support department of the sales company Attach the Sublog and update log of the device Tam ura 72XX A...

Page 415: ...hen the request has been made 81 FFFE DB error General error to access DB 81 FFFF DB error Internal error other than error to access DB file I O etc 8X 1204 L CDS update process for a model that does not support L CDS Error Codes When Using the UGW linked Function Codes displayed as eRDS errors when the UGW linked function is used Error Code Description Remedy 8 X0000 An unexpected error occurred ...

Page 416: ...notification of version information The network cable was disconnected during notification of version information Notification of version information ended in failure because the device was restarted during notification of version information UGW linkage main screen UGW linkage was turned ON while eRDS was OFF On site error dialog An internal error occurred when obtaining the applicable firmware i...

Page 417: ...e is automatically backed up to the Flash PCB When a HDD is replaced with a new one the setting value is automatically inherited from the Flash PCB at the time of HDD formatting 6 90 6 91 Backup target data Settings Registration Preferences Except for Paper Type Management Settings Adjustment Maintenance Function Settings Except for Printer Custom Settings Forwarding Settings Set Destination Excep...

Page 418: ...d up in service mode Backup data Service mode Backup of Reader Controller PCB COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMBUP Backup COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM RSRAMRES Restore Backup of DC Controller PCB COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Backup COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Restore Data is stored in Flash ROM F 6 123 T 6 39 T 6 40 Settings Enter download mode to back up restore the machine using SST The following IP...

Page 419: ...s and click Start 5 Click Upload Data button F 6 124 F 6 125 NOTE If communication cannot be established with the machine there may be a problem with the network IP address settings Start the command prompt on the PC and execute the ipconfig command As the network settings of the PC are displayed check the IP address settings Fix any problems with the settings F 6 126 CAUTION If the PC has the con...

Page 420: ...6 128 Restoration Procedure Restore data backed up from the machine with SST to the machine CAUTION The backup data can be downloaded to the machine from which the data were uploaded Listed below were the sample steps to download MeapBack 1 Use the cross cable to connect the machine to the PC with SST installed 2 Turn ON the machine power and execute the following service mode to enter download mo...

Page 421: ...oad mode and back up restore the data in the machine The data in SRAMFLASH Sraming MEAP applications and their data Meapback can be backed up restored SST SST iR iR System System MeapBackup bin MeapBackup bin USB memory storage USB memory storage iR Device iR Device HDD HDD Flash PCB Flash PCB SramImg bin SramImg bin MeapBack bin MeapBack bin Main Controller PCB Upload Download Backup Restore Uplo...

Page 422: ...acturer or the model this machine may fail to recognize the USB memory storage device This machine retries recognition of a USB memory storage device for up to 60 seconds after power ON The above menu is not displayed if the machine fails to recognize a USB memory storage device within the time period In such a case use another USB memory storage device 5 When the following menu is displayed press...

Page 423: ...ollowing cases When installing the hard disk from other machine installed When the hard disk seems to be faulty and it is highly possible to solve the problem by formatting Executing Format ALL on the machine in use deletes all the user data in the hard disk as well as the MEAP application therefore be sure to gain agreement with the user NOTE For normal version update there is no need to format t...

Page 424: ...following 3 types of formatting initialization methods are available with this machine Clear Format Menu 1 Disk Format 2 flash Format 3 HDD Encryption Board Initialize 4 Servicemode Password Clear 5 Download File Menu C Return to Main Menu Do not turn OFF power without executing the shutdown sequence Disk Format To initialize the entire hard disk Flash Format To initialize the entire FLASH PCB HDD...

Page 425: ...vice mode to enter download mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM DOWNLOAD 3 The following screen is displayed Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port Safe Version 02 00 Wait for USB SST Connect Menu Reset Start shutdown sequence Waiting SST connection Checking USB Do not turn OFF the power without executing the shutdown sequence F 6 141 4 When Root Menu USB is displayed press the numeric key ...

Page 426: ...uting format of the FLASH PCB the user data in the FLASH PCB is initialized and the machine is started Download of system software is not necessary because the system software is restored from the backup 3 HDD Encryption Board Initialize To initialize the HDD Encryption Board To execute when using the hard disk and the HDD Encryption Board that were used with the other machine When initializing th...

Page 427: ...7 7 Error Jam Alarm Error Jam Alarm Overview Error Code Jam Code Alarm Code ...

Page 428: ... 7 digit in the service manual e g E012 E000012 Location code Error code jam code and alarm code include the location information Location information is displayed as 2 digit numbers as follows In the error and jam display screen the L row corresponds to the location code Device JAM ERR ALARM imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3300 00 Main Controller 00 Printer engine 05 Cassette Feeding Unit AL1 00 05 Reader D...

Page 429: ...S Australian FOOLSCAP I B4 ISOB4 ALGL Argentina LEGAL I B5 ISOB5 ALTR Argentina LETTER I B6 ISOB6 OFI OFICIO I B7 ISOB7 A OFI Argentina OFICIO I C0 ISOC0 B OFI Bolivia OFICIO I C1 ISOC1 E OFI Ecuador OFICIO I C2 ISOC2 M OFI Mexico OFICIO I C3 ISOC3 KLGL Korea LEGAL I C4 ISOC4 GLGL Government LEGAL I C5 ISOC5 GLTR Government LETTER I C6 ISOC6 IND LGL India LEGAL I C7 ISOC7 COM10 COM10 I SRA3 SRA3 D...

Page 430: ...peration ask user to back up the data and get approval for this operation When clearing MN CON while any login application other than User Authentication is error such as not displayed login screen occurred In this case access SMS once and switch login application to User Authentication to recover to the normal status Points to Note When Clearing HDD As a remedy for error codes E602 XXXX HDD parti...

Page 431: ...ata after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E001 0002 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor Front high temperature detection error Detection description The Fixing Sub Thermistor Front in the Fixing Unit detected 295 deg C or higher for 0 ...

Page 432: ...ter the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E001 0004 05 Title Fixing Main Thermistor high temperature detection error Detection description The Fixing Main Thermistor in the Fixing Unit detected 287 deg C or higher for 0 2 sec or longer ...

Page 433: ... the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E001 0006 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor Rear high temperature detection error Detection description The Fixing Sub Thermistor Rear in the Fixing Unit detected 297 deg C or higher for 0 2 sec or lo...

Page 434: ...eplacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E002 0002 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor Front open circuit detection error Detection description The Fixing Sub Thermistor Front detected a temperature of 40 deg C or lower for 3 sec or longer from when...

Page 435: ... the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E002 0004 05 Title Fixing Main Thermistor temperature increase detection error Detection description The Fixing Main Thermistor detected a temperature increase of 1 deg C for less than 5 sec from w...

Page 436: ...replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E003 0005 05 Title Fixing Sub Thermistor Front low temperature detection error Detection description The Fixing Sub Thermistor Front detected a temperature of 80 deg C or lower for 1 sec or longer from ...

Page 437: ...TROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy 1 Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts 2 After performing the remedy work go through the following to clear the error COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERR Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FU...

Page 438: ...2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E009 0000 05 Title Fixing pressure timeout error Detection description The Fixing Pressure Release Sensor did not detect ON status within 10 sec after the sta...

Page 439: ...tion COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E010 0001 05 Title Bk Drum_ITB Motor error Detection description It did not become the specified speed for 0 5 consecutive sec although 0 8 sec have passed from the startup of the Bk Drum_ ITB Motor in the Main Drive Unit Remedy Related parts Harness between the Bk Drum_ITB Motor M02 J1054 and the DC Contr...

Page 440: ... 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E010 0003 05 Title Bk Drum_ITB Motor error Detection description There was no FG signal input for 0 3 sec from the startup of the Bk Drum_ITB Motor in the Ma...

Page 441: ...rotected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E012 0002 05 Title CL Drum Motor error Detection description The specified speed could not be maintained for 0 5 consecutive sec although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the CL Drum Motor in the Main Drive Unit Th...

Page 442: ...ackup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E013 0001 05 Title Waste Toner Feed Motor error Detection description After rotation speed of the Waste Toner Feed Motor was detected when the motor was driven it was detected that ...

Page 443: ...t so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E014 0002 05 Title Fixing Motor error Detection description The specified speed could not be maintained for 0 5 consecutive sec although it became the specified speed at least once from the startup of the Fixing ...

Page 444: ...e in the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB using a tester a If the measurement value is less than 1 ohm conduction state 1 Replace the Fixing Motor 2 Replace the DC Controller PCB b If the measurement value is 1 ohm or higher non conduction state replace the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup da...

Page 445: ...DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E020 01C8 05 Title Error in take up of Sealing Member Y Detection description The patch output value SigR failed to be 900 or less during initialization of the Developing Unit Y Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the Registration Patch Sensor Unit to the DC Controller PCB 1 Registration Pa...

Page 446: ...e to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E020 02B8 05 Title ATR Sensor M output error Detection description The output value did not exceed 120 although the control voltage of the ATR Sensor M in the Developing Unit M was increased to 192 or higher or it did not fall below 120...

Page 447: ...d parts Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E020 03A8 05 Title ATR Sensor C output error Detection descripti...

Page 448: ...DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E020 03C8 05 Title Error in take up of Sealing Member C Detection description The patch output value SigR failed to be 900 or less during initialization of the Developing Unit C Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the Registration Patch Sensor Unit to the DC Controller PCB 1 Registration Pa...

Page 449: ...e to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E020 04B8 05 Title ATR Sensor Bk output error Detection description The output value did not exceed 120 although the control voltage of the ATR Sensor Bk in the Developing Unit Bk was increased to 192 or higher or it did not fall below ...

Page 450: ... DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E021 0001 05 Title Developing Motor error Detection description It did not become the specified speed for 0 5 consecutive sec although 0 8 sec have passed from the startup of the Developing Motor Remedy Related parts Harness between the Developing Motor M10 J1190 and the DC Controller PCB ...

Page 451: ...gher non conduction state replace the Low Voltage Power Supply PCB Reference Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E021 ...

Page 452: ... the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E021 0320 05 Title Developing Screw rotation detection error C Detection description The difference between the maximum and the minimum of sampling values detected by the ATR Sensor C in the Develo...

Page 453: ...and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E025 0110 05 Title Bottle Motor error Y Detection description The Toner Supply Sensor Y did not detect change for 1 sec or longer while the Bottle Motor YM was rota...

Page 454: ...y sequence was performed for 5 times after replacement of the Toner Container Y Remedy Related parts Toner Container Y Bottle Drive Unit YM Unit of replacement BOTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY Y M Developing Unit Y UN21 Unit of replacement DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY Y ITB Rail Rear Unit Unit of replacement I T B RAIL ASSEMBLY REAR Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Error code Detail ...

Page 455: ...sequence was performed for 5 times after replacement of the Toner Container M Remedy Related parts Toner Container M Bottle Drive Unit YM Unit of replacement BOTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY Y M Developing Unit M UN22 Unit of replacement DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY M ITB Rail Rear Unit Unit of replacement I T B RAIL ASSEMBLY REAR Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Error code Detail Co...

Page 456: ...sequence was performed for 5 times after replacement of the Toner Container C Remedy Related parts Toner Container C Bottle Drive Unit CK Unit of replacement BOTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY C K Developing Unit C UN23 Unit of replacement DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY C ITB Rail Rear Unit Unit of replacement I T B RAIL ASSEMBLY REAR Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Error code Detail Co...

Page 457: ... Bk Bottle Drive Unit CK Unit of replacement BOTTLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY C K Developing Unit Bk UN24 Unit of replacement DEVELOPING ASSEMBLY BK ITB Rail Rear Unit Unit of replacement I T B RAIL ASSEMBLY REAR Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E029 5008 05 Title Registration Patch Sensor Front density error Detection descrip...

Page 458: ... Before replacing the DC Controller PCB back up the service mode data approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E073 0001 05 Title Interlock error Detection description The Interlock 24 V was n...

Page 459: ...ta after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E074 0002 05 Title ITB HP time out error Detection description There was no change after the HP Sensor in the Main Drive Unit detected home position Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the ...

Page 460: ...he data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E110 0001 05 Title Scanner Motor error Detection description The speed was not locked by FG control within 5 5 sec after startup of the Scanner Motor Remedy Related parts Flat Cable between the Y M Laser Driver PC UN08...

Page 461: ... the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E110 0003 05 Title Scanner Motor error Detection description The phase was not locked by BD control within 5 5 sec after startup of the Scanner Motor Remedy Related parts Flat Cable between the Y M...

Page 462: ...he DC Controller PCB CPU and the Main Controller PCB ASIC could not be established Remedy Related parts Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J110 and the Main Controller PCB UN05 J18 Unit of replacement DDIP CABLE DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related har...

Page 463: ...kup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E196 0101 05 Title Communication error Detection description Although access to the SCNR EEPROM from the DC Controller PCB CPU was performed 3 times no response was received and timeo...

Page 464: ...PIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E196 0801 05 Title Communication error Detection description Although access to the HVT EEPROM from the DC Controller PCB CPU was performed 3 times no response was received and timeout occurred Remedy Related parts Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J111 and the Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 J202 Unit of repl...

Page 465: ...error between the DC Controller PCB and the Cassette Unit PCB was detected Remedy Related parts Harness between the DC Controller PCB UN04 J126 and the Cassette Unit PCB Unit of replacement CABLE FEED MOTOR Cassette Unit PCB Unit of replacement CASSETTE ASSEMBLY DC Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts ...

Page 466: ...urning OFF and then ON the main power Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E197 1084 05 Title Serial communication error Detection description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Laser Driver PCB was detected An error caused by software Remedy Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power Reference Data device information is reset by turning OFF and then ON the mai...

Page 467: ...ted parts Harness between the Scanner Motor M1 J5015 and the Main Controller PCB UN05 J36 Unit of replacement CABLE MOTOR Harness between the Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS2 J5009 and the Main Controller PCB UN05 J37 Unit of replacement CABLE SENSOR Scanner Unit HP Sensor PS2 Scanner Motor M1 Unit of replacement MOTOR ASS Y Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remed...

Page 468: ...k the harnesses from the Main Controller PCB to the ADF Driver PCB 9 When 24 V is output to the ADF Driver PCB J1411 pin 2 replace the ADF Driver PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E227 0101 04 Title Power supply 24 V error Detection description The ADF Driver PCB did not detect 24 V after the start of a job Remedy Related parts Harnesses from the Main Controller PCB to the ADF D...

Page 469: ...ER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES E246 0001 00 Title System error Detection description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company E246 0002 00 Title System error Detection description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company E246 0003 00 Title System error Detection description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E246 00...

Page 470: ...Detection description The vertical scanning synchronous signal VSYNC was not transmitted normally at the Scanner Unit side that communicates with the Main Controller PCB Remedy Related parts Flat Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 J33 and the Scanner Unit Unit of replacement CABLE FLAT Scanner Unit Unit of replacement SCANNER UNIT Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLE...

Page 471: ...ent MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Stream Reading Glass Unit of replacement GLASS READER Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E302 0002 04 Title Shading error Detection description An error in the shading value was detected at black shading Remedy Related parts Harness between the Scanner Unit and the LED PCB Unit of repl...

Page 472: ...n An abnormal signal from the Main Controller PCB to the Reader was detected Remedy Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY E315 0510 00 Title Device timeout error Detection description An image synchronous signal from the Main Controller PCB to the Reader could not be detected for 30 sec or longer Remedy Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB U...

Page 473: ...ror Remedy Contact to the sales company E351 0000 00 Title System error Detection description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company E354 0001 00 Title System error Detection description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company E354 0002 00 Title System error Detection description System error Remedy Contact to the sales company Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E3...

Page 474: ... 3 Replace the Finisher Controller PCB Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E503 0002 02 Title Communication error Detection description A communication error between the Finisher Controller PCB and the Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB was detected Remedy STA...

Page 475: ...nd Assist Guide HP error Detection description a The Assist HP Sensor was not turned OFF although 1 second had passed after the Assist Motor operation started b The rear end assist guide does not come off the Rear End Assist Guide HP Sensor although the Rear End Assist Guide Motor has been driven for 3 seconds Remedy a INNER FIN G1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controlle...

Page 476: ...d The last paper fold operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor Remedy INNER FIN G1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paper Fold HP Sensor Harnesses and connectors from the Finisher Controller PCB to the Paddle Motor Paper Fold HP Sensor PS8 Paddle Motor M10 Finisher Controller PCB PCB1 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cabl...

Page 477: ...connectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E530 8002 02 Title a Rear Alignment Motor error b Front Aligning Plate HP error Detection description a The Rear Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after the...

Page 478: ... connectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E531 8002 02 Title a Stapler Motor error b Staple HP error Detection description a The Staple HP Sensor was not turned ON although 0 4 seconds had passed after the Stapler Motor operation started...

Page 479: ...onnectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E532 8002 02 Title a Stapler Shift Motor error b Stapler Shift HP error Detection description a The Stapler Shift HP Sensor was not turned ON although 10 seconds had passed after the Stapler Shift ...

Page 480: ...ng the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E535 8001 02 Title Swing Guide HP error Detection description The swing guide does not come off the Swing Guide HP Sensor although the Swing Guide Motor has been driven for 3 seconds Remedy STAPLE FIN U1 BOOKLET FIN U1 Related parts Harnesses...

Page 481: ...connectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E537 8002 02 Title a Front Alignment Motor error b Rear Aligning Plate HP error Detection description a The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned ON although 5 seconds had passed after th...

Page 482: ... Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E540 8002 02 Title a Tray Shift Motor error b Tray 1 shift area error Detection description a The Front Alignment Plate HP Sensor was not turned OFF or the Stack Tray Lower Limit Sensor was not turned ON although 3 5 seconds had passed after the Front Alignment Motor operation started in the tray down opera...

Page 483: ...nisher Controller PCB PCB1 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E542 8002 02 Title Tray 2 shift area error Detection description The tray exceeded the upper or lower limit be...

Page 484: ... replace the corresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E577 0002 02 Title Paddle Motor error Detection description The Return Belt HP Sensor was not turned ON although 1 second had passed after the Paddle Motor operation started The last paddle operation is not finished when driving the Paddle Motor Remedy INNER FIN G1 Related parts ...

Page 485: ...Sensor PI113 Stack Ejection Motor M102 Stack Ejection Lower Roller Clutch CL102 Shutter Clutch CL101 Finisher Controller PCB PCB1 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts Reference When replacing the Finisher Controller PCB refer to Adjustment Adjustment when Replacing the Parts in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E5F0 80...

Page 486: ...rresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E5F2 8001 02 Title Saddle Guide HP error Detection description The Saddle Guide HP Sensor does not detect the guide plate although the Saddle Guide Motor has been driven for 700 pulses Remedy STAPLE FIN U1 BOOKLET FIN U1 Related parts Harnesses and connectors from the Saddle Stitcher Controller...

Page 487: ...SW5 Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB2 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E5F5 8001 02 Title Stitcher Front HP error Detection description The Stitcher HP Switch Front does not detect the stitcher front although the Stitcher Motor Front has been driven for 0 48 seconds Remedy STAPLE FIN U1 BOOKLET FIN...

Page 488: ... Saddle Stitcher Controller PCB PCB2 Remedy Check replace the corresponding harnesses cables or connectors or the parts E5F6 8004 02 Title Paper Pushing Plate position error Detection description The paper pushing plate does not come off the paper folding position although the Saddle Paper Pushing Plate Motor has been driven for 0 1 seconds Remedy STAPLE FIN U1 BOOKLET FIN U1 Related parts Harness...

Page 489: ...ion description An error was detected in the PDL related file storage area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Unit of replacement CABLE SATA POWER CABLE SATA SIGNAL HDD Unit of replacement...

Page 490: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0211 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in ...

Page 491: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0311 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in the MEAP related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup o...

Page 492: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 3 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 4 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0411 00 Title HDD error Detection description Logical partition error was detected File could not be written in the HDD after startup or I O erro...

Page 493: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0511 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in ...

Page 494: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0611 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in the storage area of image data after startup File could not be written in ...

Page 495: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0711 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in general application temporary area temporary file File could not be writte...

Page 496: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0811 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in the general application related area File could not be written in the HDD ...

Page 497: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 0911 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in PDL spool data temporary file File could not be written in the HDD after s...

Page 498: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1011 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in the SEND related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup o...

Page 499: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1111 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in the update related area File could not be written in the HDD after startup...

Page 500: ...tartup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 4 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 5 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1211 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in the license related area File could not be written in the HDD after startu...

Page 501: ... UN05 and the HDD Unit of replacement CABLE SATA POWER CABLE SATA SIGNAL HDD Unit of replacement HARD DISK DRIVE Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the cable between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD 2 Select COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE 13 and execute HD CHECK The...

Page 502: ...ror at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 and the HDD Unit of replacement CABLE SATA POWER CABLE SATA SIGNAL HDD Unit of replacement HARD DISK DRIVE Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y Remedy Perform the following ...

Page 503: ... the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1801 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in the image data storage area in Advanced Box Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it ma...

Page 504: ...ence All data in the HDD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 1901 00 Title HDD error Detection description An error was detected in the storage area of data for printing Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally There...

Page 505: ...DD is deleted 6 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 2000 00 Title Authentication error between the host machine and the Encryption Board Detection description Authentication between the host machine and the Encryption Board could not be performed because I O error occurred in the file system after startup Re...

Page 506: ...ing 2 8 startup and execute 4 Clear Format 1 Disk Format HDD format using SST or a USB memory Reference All data in the HDD is deleted 5 After replacing the HDD format the HDD 6 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E602 FF11 00 Title HDD error Detection description An HDD error was detected after startup Unidentified Remedy Related parts Cable between th...

Page 507: ... 5 Replace the Main Controller PCB Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E614 0006 00 Title Error in file system on the Flash PCB Detection description Bootable was not found on the Flash PCB Remedy Related parts Flash PCB UN61 Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared Rein...

Page 508: ... restoration refer to Adjustment Actions after Replacement and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E614 0201 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection description An error was detected in the system area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not ...

Page 509: ... restoration refer to Adjustment Actions after Replacement and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E614 0301 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection description An error was detected in the system area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not ...

Page 510: ...nd restoration refer to Adjustment Actions after Replacement and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E614 0401 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection description Logical partition error was detected Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be...

Page 511: ... was detected in the general application related area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts Flash PCB UN61 Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the...

Page 512: ...tion E614 0601 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection description An error was detected in the license related area Initialization failed at startup or I O error at startup When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Related parts Flash PCB UN61 Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASS Y Remedy Per...

Page 513: ...re using SST or a USB memory 7 Replace the Main Controller PCB Reference For backup and restoration refer to Adjustment Actions after Replacement and Appendix Backup Data List in the Service Manual Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E614 0711 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection description An error was detected in system setting value service mode etc storage area File could not be wr...

Page 514: ...e OS kernel was not found When this error occurs the system has not been started normally Therefore it may not be recorded in the error log Remedy Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Disconnect and then connect the connectors of the Flash PCB UN61 and the Main Power Switch and check if there is any bent pin or cable disconnection 2 Format the sys...

Page 515: ...ch and check if there is any bent pin or cable disconnection 2 Format the system 2 1 Enter safe mode using 2 8 startup and execute 4 Clear Format 2 Flash Format Flash format using a USB memory 2 2 Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 3 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E614 9001 ...

Page 516: ...8 startup and execute 4 Clear Format 2 Flash Format Flash format using a USB memory 2 2 Reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory 3 After replacing the Flash PCB reinstall the system software using SST or a USB memory Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E614 FF01 00 Title Flash PCB error Detection description Flash error Unidentified Initialization failed at startup or I...

Page 517: ...r in self diagnosis of the encryption module Detection description An error was detected in self diagnosis of the encryption library Remedy Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared Reinstall the necessary application software and restore the backup data once the error is cleared 1 After reinstalling the system software using SST or a USB memory turn OFF...

Page 518: ...on A communication error occurred when starting the Timer Device used for fax Remedy Remedy Replace the Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY E674 0020 07 Title Fax Board communication error Detection description An error occurred in the modem IC used for fax Remedy Related parts Harness between the Fax Board and the Main Controller PCB UN05 J30 Unit of replacem...

Page 519: ...replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E713 0011 05 Title Communication error Detection description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Finisher was detected Remedy Related parts a STAPLE BOOKLET FINISHER U1 Harnesses...

Page 520: ... the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E713 0021 05 Title Communication error Detection description A communication error between the DC Controller PCB and the Finisher was detected Remedy Related parts a STAPLE BOOKLET FINISHER U1 Harn...

Page 521: ...er the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E713 0030 05 Title Communication error Detection description Communication between the DC Controller PCB and the Finisher was not completed Remedy Related parts a STAPLE BOOKLET FINISHER U1 Harne...

Page 522: ...iption E719 0003 00 Title Coin vendor error Detection description A communication error with the coin vendor was detected during unit price acquisition at startup Remedy Related parts Cable between the charging management equipment and the host machine Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Disconnect and then connect the connector to check that the...

Page 523: ...ASSEMBLY Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Check replace the related harness cable connector and parts Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E732 0010 00 Title Scanner communication error Detection description DDI S communication error Vsync detection error was detected Remedy Related parts Flat Cable between the Main Controller PCB UN05 J3...

Page 524: ... Controller PCB UN04 Unit of replacement DC CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Main Controller PCB UN05 Unit of replacement MAIN CONTROLLER PCB ASSEMBLY Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check the harness between the DC Controller PCB and the Main Controller PCB 2 Turn ON the power and check if the initialization is executed at startup 2 1 If the initiali...

Page 525: ... After replacing the Image Analysis Board perform step 1 Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E746 0023 00 Title Image Analysis Board error Detection description Communication from the Image Analysis Board could not be detected Remedy Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Check that the Image Analysis Board is installed properly by remo...

Page 526: ...When the restoration completion screen is displayed click OK Remove the USB memory and turn OFF and then ON the main power Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E746 0033 00 Title TPM error Detection description It was detected that data in TPM was inconsistent Remedy Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared Perform the appropriate remedy acc...

Page 527: ... Controller PCB UN05 J29 and J23 and the HDD Unit of replacement CABLE SATA POWER CABLE SATA SIGNAL Flash PCB UN61 Remedy Perform the following in the order while checking whether the error is cleared 1 Disconnect the cable between the Main Controller PCB and the HDD and turn ON the main power a When the error code has not been changed 1 Obtain the necessary backup data by referring to the backup ...

Page 528: ...ata approx 2 min and restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E806 0101 05 Title Front Fan error Detection description A state of caught cable was detected within 15 sec when the Front Fan was driven Remedy Re...

Page 529: ...restore the backup data after the replacement so the data may be able to be protected Backup COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMBUP Restoration COPIER LEVEL2 FUNCTION SYSTEM DSRAMRES Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E811 0000 05 Title Fuse in the Fixing Fuse PCB blowout error Detection description The fuse in the Fixing Fuse PCB was not blown out at power on Remedy Related parts Fi...

Page 530: ...tle Temperature detection error Detection description The thermistor in the Laser Driver PCB consecutively detected a temperature outside of the specified range Remedy Related parts Flat Cable between the Y M Laser Driver PCB UN08 J203 and the C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 J801 Unit of replacement CABLE FLAT C Bk Laser Driver PCB UN09 Unit of replacement LASER SCANNER ASSEMBLY Remedy 1 Check replace ...

Page 531: ... to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence Error code Detail Code Location Item Description E996 0CAF 05 Title Error for collecting sequence jam log Finisher Detection description Error for collecting jam log Finisher Continuous 0CAF jam was detected Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and co...

Page 532: ...t debug log and contact to the sales company Reference By setting COPIER LEVEL2 OPTION FNC SW JM ERR D to 1 it is handled as an error instead of a jam from the first occurrence E996 0CF4 05 Title Error for collecting sequence jam log Printer Detection description Error for collecting jam log Printer Continuous 0CF4 jam was detected Remedy Remedy Collect debug log and contact to the sales company R...

Page 533: ...ailure of a drive roller Power on A power on jam occurs when a sensor detected ON state at power on Remaining paper in the machine Soiling on the target sensor Failure of the target sensor Foreign matter on the target sensor paper dust paper lint Type Overview of detection Check items in arbitrary order Error avoidance An error avoidance jam occurs when an error in the machine excluding parts fail...

Page 534: ...nd delivery Reverse sensor PS51 00 0209 Stationary jam Third delivery sensor PS52 00 020A Stationary jam Reverse Sensor PS12 00 020B Stationary jam Pre Registration Sensor PS22 00 0706 Wrap jam Fixingt Delivery Sensor PS10 00 0A01 Power ON jam Cassette 1 Vertical Path Sensor PS08 00 0A02 Power ON jam Cassette 2 Vertical Path Sensor PS24 00 0A03 Power ON jam Cassette 3 Vertical Path Sensor PS101 00...

Page 535: ...ble stop of paper feed 00 AA30 Forcible stop of paper feed 00 AA31 Forcible stop of paper feed 00 AA32 Forcible stop of paper feed 00 AA33 Forcible stop of paper feed 00 AA40 Forcible stop of paper feed 00 AA41 Forcible stop of paper feed 00 AA70 Forcible stop of paper feed 00 AA71 Forcible stop of paper feed 00 AA72 Forcible stop of paper feed 00 AA99 Forcible stop of paper feed 1 The state is re...

Page 536: ...4 Stationary Delivery sensor 1st sheet SR3 01 0071 Sequence 1 01 0090 ADF Open Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor front rear PS_N1 N2 01 0091 ADF Open Copyboard Cover Open Closed Sensor front rear When paper is stopped temporarily PS_N1 N2 01 0092 Cover Open Cover open closed sensor SR6 01 0093 Cover Open Cover open closed sensor When paper is stopped temporarily SR6 01 0095 Pickup Error Registrat...

Page 537: ...ple less binding jam Clinch Motor error 02 1804 Staple less binding jam Staple less binding jam time out error of binding operation 02 1805 Staple less binding jam Staple less binding jam time out error of return operation after binding 02 1C14 Retry Error 1 Assist Motor error 02 1C16 Retry Error 1 Paddle Motor error 02 1C30 Retry Error 1 Rear Alignment Motor error 02 1C32 Retry Error 1 Staple Mot...

Page 538: ...addle No 2 Paper Sensor Saddle No 3 Paper Sensor PI18 PI19 PI20 02 1109 Stationary Saddle Delivery Sensor PI11 02 1205 Early jams Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PI201 02 1305 Power ON Buffer Pass Inlet Sensor PI201 02 1306 Power ON Buffer Pass Outlet Sensor PI202 02 1380 Power ON Saddle Delivery Sensor Saddle Vertical Path Paper Sensor addle No 1 Paper Sensor Saddle No 2 Paper Sensor Saddle No 3 Paper S...

Page 539: ...on controlled by the DCON has been changed Due to a change in the configuration related to the printer a change in the hardware configuration which requires turning OFF and then ON the power was detected Detection condition timing At the time of startup only Remedy Turn OFF and then ON the main power 02 0025 Insufficient Scanner Unit LED light intensity alarm In the case that the light intensity i...

Page 540: ...host machine side to see if there is missing or swing with the gear 3 4 Check the Cassette 2 Lifter Motor 3 5 Replace the DC Controller Location Code Alarm Code Description Details 04 0003 Cassette 3 Lifter error Cause Error in the Lifter Motor or the Lifter Sensor Measures 1 While the Cassette 3 is removed turn ON the power and then insert the Cassette 3 and check the operation sound of the motor...

Page 541: ...ose Tray feed direction and check the operation sound of the motor When there is operation sound of the motor check if the Pickup Roller moves up and down When the Pickup Roller moves up and down 1 1 Check that the HP Sensor has been properly installed 1 2 Check the sensor shield plate 1 3 Check the harness connector between the DC Controller and the HP Sensor 1 4 Check the HP Sensor 1 5 Replace t...

Page 542: ...er M level warning display Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW 10 0004 Toner low Yellow Toner Y level warning display Not displayed on service mode history due to the alarm being generated by UGW Location Code Alarm Code Description Details 10 0006 Patch Sensor error 1 Cause Soiled Patch Sensor window shutter failure or Patch Sensor failure Measures In ord...

Page 543: ...ter Solenoid 5 Check the harness connector between the DC Controller PCB and the Registration Sensor 6 Replace the Registration Sensor Unit 7 Replace the DC Controller PCB At this time be sure to perform backup and restoration according to the steps to be taken before after replacing the DC Controller 10 0017 Toner Y prior delivery alarm An alarm for requesting a prior delivery is sent to UGW as t...

Page 544: ...0 Pre exposure LED Driver PCB DCDC FM1 D807 000 LED PCB FM1 D865 LED_DRV_RELAY_CABLE FM1 D864 DCON_LED_DRV_CABLE FM1 D866 EXP_LED_CABLE Location Code Alarm Code Description Details 29 0201 Drum M pre exposure alarm An error in pre exposure of the drum M was detected Detection condition timing Warm up rotation Detection condition When the difference in detection value is within the specified value ...

Page 545: ...0 Pre exposure LED Driver PCB DCDC FM1 D807 000 LED PCB FM1 D865 LED_DRV_RELAY_CABLE FM1 D864 DCON_LED_DRV_CABLE FM1 D866 EXP_LED_CABLE Location Code Alarm Code Description Details 29 0401 Drum K pre exposure alarm An error in pre exposure of the drum K was detected Detection condition timing Warm up rotation Detection condition When the difference in detection value is within the specified value ...

Page 546: ... Unit of the corresponding station 5 Replace the ITB Unit 6 Replace the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB 7 Replace the DC Controller PCB Location Code Alarm Code Description Details 30 0027 A voltage value below the threshold value was detected with primary transfer ATVC control for cyan Remedy 1 Check the harness between the Primary Transfer High Voltage PCB and the DC Controller PCB open circui...

Page 547: ...cription Details 31 0009 FLASH failure prediction alarm Cause Error in the S M A R T value of FLASH memory It indicates a physical error of the FLASH memory which is expected to soon lead to a failure S M A R T Self Monitoring Analysis and Reporting Technology It is a self diagnosis function built in the FLASH memory and monitors the occurrence rate of reading errors reading writing speed total nu...

Page 548: ...djustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Correct Color Mismatch Location Code Alarm Code Description Details 34 2201 As a result of wrong detection processing data that can be used for correction in the vertical scanning direction was not found M 34 2211 As a result of wrong detection processing data that can be used for correction in the horizontal scanning direction was not found M 34 230...

Page 549: ...nce Kit 35 0093 MP Feed Roller replacement completion alarm The counter of the MP Feed Roller was cleared 37 0001 For R D 37 0002 For R D 37 0003 For R D 37 0004 For R D 37 0005 For R D 37 0006 For R D 37 0007 For R D 37 1000 For R D 37 2000 For R D 38 0001 For R D 38 0002 For R D Location Code Alarm Code Description Details 40 0070 Drum Unit Y prior delivery alarm An alarm for requesting a prior ...

Page 550: ...r R D 80 0015 Invalid BDL data Use the latest version of the printer driver for the model 80 0016 For R D 80 0018 For R D 80 0019 For R D 81 0001 Invalid data Since there is a high possibility that format of the data is not supported collect the data if possible 81 0002 For R D 81 0003 For R D 81 0004 For R D 81 0005 For R D 83 0005 PDF memory insufficient Reduce the size of the PDF file to be pri...

Page 551: ...egistration Function Settings Printer Printer Settings Settings Printer Operation Mode and send the data 84 0001 For R D 84 0002 For R D 84 0003 XPS print range error There is no page that be can be processed within the specified print range Specify the print range correctly 84 0004 For R D 84 0005 For R D 84 0006 For R D 84 0007 For R D 84 0008 XPS non support image error Convert Jpeg XR in data ...

Page 552: ...8 8 Service Mode Service Mode Overview COPIER FEEDER SORTER BOARD ...

Page 553: ...nction to backup the service mode setting values RESTORE The function to restore the service mode setting values SITUATION The function to search service mode in accordance with the purpose F 8 1 T 8 1 Service mode item explanations Explanatory texts for the initial window main items sub items and minor items can be displayed Select the desired initial window main item sub item or minor item then ...

Page 554: ...cal parts intended and its device classification For instance if the host machine uses paper pass detection sensor then press the button on the COPIER and P Sensor position Device classification Electrical parts classification 2 Then the selected electrical parts classification s mark name port number and 0 1 content will appear 3 If the i button is pressed the screen displaying the electrical par...

Page 555: ...r other general items IMG MCON MN CON image related and image related items other than those referred to above Image quality copy speed IMG SPD Power down sequence Cleaning CLEANING Cleaning of charging unit drum transfer roller etc Environment settings ENV SET Temperature humidity environmental heater condensation log acquisition Paper feed pickup delivery FEED SW Stack performance motor speed ad...

Page 556: ...mation Settings System Manager ID System PIN 2 After entering the password for service technician Service mode COPIER Option FNC SW SM PSWD press OK button SM PSWD NOTE If Service Engineer s password is forgotten password function is cancelable by using Service Support Tool SST F 8 6 F 8 7 Switching Screen Level 1 2 Switching screens between level 1 and 2 has been made easier When level 1 screen i...

Page 557: ...INT is supported Service mode level 1 COPIER FUNCTION MISC P RPT FILE OK The created data file is saved in the HDD of the machine The created saved data is deleted when it is moved to the SST or a USB memory device Even if the machine has stopped operation due to a no paper error data can be moved to the SST or the USB memory device as long as the machine can enter download mode How to obtain the ...

Page 558: ...LE and then press OK 2 Generating report file After the ACTIVE blinks for 3 to 4 minutes generation of a report file is complete as OK is displayed PJH P 2 USBH PRT RPT FILE OK RPT2USB F 8 10 3 Connect the USB memory storage device to the USB port 4 Select service mode Copier Function MISC P RPT2USB and then press OK PJH P 2 USBH PRT RPT FILE OK RPT2USB NOTE If the downloaded file is opened as pla...

Page 559: ...eport file After the ACTIVE blinks for 3 to 4 minutes generation of a report file is complete as OK is displayed PJH P 2 USBH PRT RPT FILE OK RPT2USB F 8 12 3 Execute Download mode 5 Download File 4 ServicePrint Download Download File Menu USB 1 SUBLOG Download 4 ServicePrint Download C Return to Main Menu Reset Start shutdown sequence 4 has been selected Execute OK 0 CANCEL Any other keys NOTE If...

Page 560: ...e report file to a PC using SST Moving the service report file to a PC using SST 1 Start up the SST 2 Select the model 1 and the type of system software 2 Single then check the network settings and click START 1 2 3 Click Upload Data F 8 14 F 8 15 4 Select P PRINT RPT txt and click Start 5 Select the name of the Folder to store and as necessary a brief description then click Save 6 Click OK F 8 16...

Page 561: ...ly added to improve workability and searchability at the site This mode makes it possible to easily use the service mode appropriate for the scene at the site The following three points are made available depending on each situation a Display of related service mode when an adjustment is necessary b Display of causes and remedies c Display of related images a b c F 8 18 F 8 19 ...

Page 562: ...SION LANG FR Display of French language file version Lv 1 Details To display the version of French language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG DE Display of German language file version Lv 1 Details To display the version of German language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG IT Display of Italian lang...

Page 563: ...NG BU Display of Bulgarian language file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Bulgarian language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION LANG CR Display of Croatian language file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Croatian language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG RM Displ...

Page 564: ...ils To display the Greek language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY ET Dspl of COPY appli Estonian file version Lv 2 Details To display the Estonian language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY FI Dspl of CO...

Page 565: ...UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION COPY VN Dspl of COPY appli Vietnamese file ver Lv 2 Details To display the Vietnamese language file version of COPY application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPY AR Dspl of COPY appli Arabic file ver Lv 2 Details To display the Arabic language fil...

Page 566: ...ils To display the Hungarian language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SEND NL Dspl of SEND appli Dutch file version Lv 2 Details To display the Dutch language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND NO Dspl of SEND...

Page 567: ... Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SEND HI Dspl of SEND appli Hindi file ver Lv 2 Details To display the Hindi language file version of SEND application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 SEND EU Dspl of SEND appli Euskera file ver Lv 2 Details To display the Euskera langua...

Page 568: ...sh language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION INTRO PT Dspl usful feat intro Portuguese filever Lv 2 Details To display the version of Portuguese language file of Introduction to Useful Features application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 INTR...

Page 569: ...irmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN FR Dspl of quick menu French file version Lv 1 Details To display the version of French language file for Quick Menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN IT Dspl of quick menu Italian file version Lv 1 Details To display the versio...

Page 570: ...rsion of Swedish language file for Quick Menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION CSTMN ID Dspl of quick menu Indonesian file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Indonesian language file for Quick Menu application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 CSTMN BU Dspl of quick menu Bulg...

Page 571: ...of accessibility Korean file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT CS Dspl of accessibility Czech file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Czech language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Disp...

Page 572: ...ading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ACSBT CA Dspl of accessibility Catalan file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Catalan language file for Accessibility application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 ACSBT TH Dspl of accessibility Thai file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Thai language file f...

Page 573: ...RS Error Recovery System COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS ET Display of ERS Estonian file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Estonian language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement memo ERS Error Recovery System ERS FI Display of ERS Finnish file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Finnish language file for ER...

Page 574: ... To display the version of Thai language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 Supplement memo ERS Error Recovery System COPIER DISPLAY VERSION ERS VN Display of ERS Vietnamese file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Vietnamese language file for ERS application Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 ...

Page 575: ... for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BOX KO Display of BOX appli Korean file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Korean language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX CS Display of BOX appli Czech file version Lv 2 Details To d...

Page 576: ...display the version of Romanian language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION BOX SK Display of BOX appli Slovak file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Slovak language file for BOX application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 BOX TK Dspl of BOX ...

Page 577: ...y the version of Hungarian language file for Self Copy application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SC NL Display of SC appli Dutch file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Dutch language file for Self Copy application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 SC NO Dspl of SC...

Page 578: ...C appli Euskera file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Euskera language file for Self Copy application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 COPIER DISPLAY VERSION SC HI Dspl of SC appli Hindi file version Lv 2 Details To display the version of Hindi language file for Self Copy application JAVA UI Use case When upgrading the firmware Display...

Page 579: ...A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 LANG EU Dspl of Euskera language file ver Lv 2 Details To display the version of Euskera language file Use case When upgrading the firmware Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 00 01 to 99 99 BF PASS Display of BF CONT firmware version Lv 1 Details To display the firmware version of Buffer Pass Unit Controller PCB Use cas...

Page 580: ... range 0 to 1 0 Not yet connected 1 Connected SORTER Connect state of Finisher related option Lv 1 Details To display the connection state of Finisher related options Use case When checking the connection of Finisher related options Display adj set range Left column connection state of Finisher related options 1 to 5 1 Without Saddle 2 With Saddle without Folding Unit 3 With Saddle and Inserter wi...

Page 581: ...g name of the PCB that is connected to PCI2 Display adj set range No PCB connected iSLOT iSLOT Wireless LAN PCB Voice Board Voice PCB Voice Board R Voice Recognition PCB Display is hidden on this machine 3DES Board Encryption PCB 1Gbit Board Giga Ethernet PCB PCI3 Display of PCI3 connected PCB name Lv 1 Details To display the name of the PCB that is connected to PCI3 Use case When checking name of...

Page 582: ...d N A Display only Display adj set range 0 to 300 Unit 1 deg C Appropriate target value 20 230 FIX E2 Dspl Fixing Heater front edg temperature Lv 1 Details To display the front edge temperature of the Fixing Heater detected by the Sub Thermistor 1 Use case When checking the edge temperature of the Fixing Heater Adj set operate method N A Display only Display adj set range 0 to 300 Unit 1 deg C App...

Page 583: ...TVC EX 1ATVC C Dspl C clr prmry trns ATVC base voltage Lv 2 Details To display the base voltage Vb derived from primary transfer ATVC control 1 1 speed for C color As Vb is closer to 3500 the Primary Transfer Roller is closer to the end of life so image failure leopard pattern image or mottled image due to poor transfer is likely to occur Use case When estimating the life of Primary Transfer Rolle...

Page 584: ...R DISPLAY CCD GAIN OG Gain level of Img Sensor odd bit G Lv 2 Details To display the Green gain level adjustment value in odd numbered bit on CMOS Sensor of Scanner Unit Continuous display of upper limit is considered a failure of the Scanner Unit Main Controller PCB When the value is out of the target value range image failure or E302 shading error may have occurred Identify the cause according t...

Page 585: ...of the target value range image failure or E302 shading error may have occurred Identify the cause according to the value Use case When replacing the Main Controller PCB When replacing the Scanner Unit At scanned image failure Display adj set range 0 to 143 Appropriate target value 0 143 LAMP CL Scan Lamp intensity adj VL color Lv 2 Details To display the LED light intensity adjustment value of Sc...

Page 586: ... Appropriate target value 300 300 Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL C COPIER DISPLAY DENS DENS K Dspl Bk color toner density change ratio Lv 1 Details To display the deviation of Bk color toner density from the target value in percentage If the deviation is not acceptable E020 occurs This may be caused by deterioration of the developer failure disconnection of the Toner Density Sensor ...

Page 587: ...age failure fogging carrier adherence low density etc Display adj set range 0 to 255 Appropriate target value 50 200 Related service mode COPIER DISPLAY DENS DENS C COPIER DISPLAY DENS SGNL K Display of Bk color toner density Lv 1 Details To display the measured value of Bk color toner density The density is measured with the ATR Sensor Bk for each job The value is updated upon print operation aft...

Page 588: ...y TD ratio detected by the ATR Sensor at ATR control from the target value are shown Sharp change in values may indicate ATR Sensor disconnection failure whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in toner supply system Use case When checking the toner density in the Developing Unit at low density or fogging deterioration Display adj set range 700 to 700 Unit 0 01 Appropriate target val...

Page 589: ...lied per paper Use case When checking toner supply status at E020 occurrence low density or fogging deterioration Display adj set range 0 to 100 Appropriate target value 0 10 COPIER DISPLAY DENS P D P Y Dspl rear side Y M drk crrnt Pwave Lv 2 Details To display the Y M color dark current P wave detected by the Registration Patch Sensor Unit Rear At low density or fogging deterioration use this ite...

Page 590: ...r at ATR control from the target value are shown Sharp change in values may indicate ATR Sensor disconnection failure whereas gradual change in values may indicate failure in toner supply system Use case When checking the toner density in the Developing Unit at low density or fogging deterioration Display adj set range 700 to 700 Unit 0 01 Appropriate target value 300 300 SPL LG K Display of Bk co...

Page 591: ...lay the Bk color laser light intensity in real time Use case When analyzing the cause of the image density failure Display adj set range 00 to FF Appropriate target value 50 FF TNRB IDY Display of Y color Toner Container ID Lv 1 Details To display the ID of Y color Toner Container that is installed to the machine Use case When checking whether the barcode ID on the Toner Container is read correctl...

Page 592: ...value Check the Patch Sensor if not corrected Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 700 COPIER DISPLAY HT C TGT B M Dspl ARCDAT screen B M color target VL Lv 2 Details To display the M color patch target value of screen B in ARCDAT control When hue variation occurs and the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradati...

Page 593: ... the displayed value is not in the tolerable range execute the auto gradation adjustment reset the target value Check the Patch Sensor if not corrected Use case When hue variation occurs Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Appropriate target value 0 700 SUM A Y For R D SUM A M For R D SUM A C For R D SUM A K For R D SUM B Y For R D SUM B M For R D SUM B C For R D SUM B K For R D SUM C Y For R D SUM C ...

Page 594: ... Disengagement HP Sensor PS33 1 HP detected 7 6 5 4 3 2 Finisher Connection Detection H Not yet connected L Connected 1 0 Drum Cleaning Pre exposure Detection H Not detected L Detected Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P004 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor B PS20 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 2 Cassette 2 Paper Level Sensor A PS19 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 1 Ca...

Page 595: ...aste toner container detection switch SW01 0 None 1 Detected 6 5 4 Multi purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 2 PS31 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 3 Multi purpose Tray Paper Length Sensor 1 PS30 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 2 1 0 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P013 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Cassette 1 Size Switch_0 SW13 0 ON 1 OFF 7 Cassette 1 Size Switch_1 SW13 0 ON 1 OFF 6 Cassette 1 Size Switch...

Page 596: ...er absence 1 Paper presence Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P023 15 14 Second Delivery Motor M31 0 ON 1 OFF 13 12 11 10 Reverce Motor M30 0 ON 1 OFF 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 P024 0 15 P025 0 15 P026 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 Duplex Merging Motor M14 0 ON 1 OFF 8 Cassette 1 2 Feed Multi purpose Pickup Motor M13 0 ON 1 OFF 7 Primary Transfer Roller Disengagement Motor M08 0 ON 1 OFF 6 Duplex Reverse Motor M11 ...

Page 597: ... Switch A_2 SW102 0 ON 1 OFF 10 Cassette 3 Size Switch B_0 SW103 0 ON 1 OFF 9 Cassette 3 Size Switch B_1 SW103 0 ON 1 OFF 8 Cassette 3 Size Switch B_2 SW103 0 ON 1 OFF 7 6 Cassette Right Door Open Close Detection Switch SW101 0 OPEN 1 CLOSE 5 Cassette 3 Paper Sensor PS102 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 4 Cassette 3 Lifter Sensor PS104 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 3 2 Cassette 4 Paper Sensor ...

Page 598: ...r 4 SR12 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 6 Different width sensor 3 SR11 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 5 Different width sensor 2 SR10 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 4 Different width sensor 1 SR9 0 Paper absence 1 Paper presence 3 2 1 0 P004 0 7 P005 0 7 T 8 18 SORTER P001 to P056 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P001 7 Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 2 Finisher U1 PI120 0 Paper absence 1 Paper ...

Page 599: ...nd Assist Guide HP Sensor PI109 0 HP 3 2 1 0 P013 0 7 P014 0 7 P015 0 7 P016 0 7 Address bit Name Symbol Remarks P017 7 Tray 2 Paper Surface Sensor 1 PI115 1 Paper presence 6 Tray 1 Paper Surface Sensor PI114 1 Paper presence 5 Shutter HP Sensor PI113 0 Closed 4 Stapler Shift HP Sensor PI110 1 HP 3 Stapler Alignment Interference Sensor PI116 0 Interference 2 Staple Sensor PI52 0 Needle presence 1 ...

Page 600: ...Paper presence 6 Saddle Guide HP Sensor PI13 1 HP 5 Saddle Crescent Roller Phase Sensor PI12 1 HP 4 Saddle Delivery Sensor PI11 0 Paper presence 3 Saddle Inlet Cover Sensor PI9 1 Open 2 Saddle No 3 Paper Sensor PI20 1 Paper presence 1 Saddle No 2 Paper Sensor PI19 1 Paper presence 0 Saddle No 1 Paper Sensor PI18 1 Paper presence P032 0 7 P033 0 7 P034 0 7 P035 0 7 P036 0 7 P037 0 7 P038 0 7 P039 0...

Page 601: ...ged write the changed value in the service label Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST ADJ XY ADJ S Adj of shading position vert scan way Lv 1 Details To adjust the reading position in vertical scanning direction of the Standard White Plate when black line white line appears When replacing the Scanner Unit execute RDSHDPOS and write the value of this item in the ...

Page 602: ... P PRINT When replacing the Copyboard Glass enter the value of barcode label which is affixed on the glass Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Output the service mode setting values by P PRINT beforehand Display adj se...

Page 603: ...ard Glass Scanner Unit execute COPIER FUNCTION CCD DF WLVL1 DF WLVL2 Use case When replacing the Copyboard Glass Scanner Unit When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Output the service mode setting values by P PRINT beforehand Display adj set range 1 to 2047 Default value 1156 R...

Page 604: ...K key Caution It is recommended to use this item from situation mode Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit 1 16 pixel Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST IMG REG REG HS C Fine adj C clr wrt start pstn horz scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the write start position of C color image in the horizontal scanning direction in increments of 1 pixel or less Use case When C color displacement in the horizontal scannin...

Page 605: ...ter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution It is recommended to use this item from situation mode Display adj set range 128 to 127 Unit 1 16 pixel Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST IMG REG MAG H Adj of stdrd magnifictn ratio horz scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the standard magnification ratio in the horizontal scanning direction by increasing decreasing the number of p...

Page 606: ...o 4 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR LS INT H COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS H YL YR ML MC MR KL KC KR COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS H YR Adj Y C copy ratio correction offset 3 Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of copy ratio correction between Y color and C color Enter the value of a C Y color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left im...

Page 607: ...Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR LS INT H COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS H YL YC YR ML MC KL KC KR COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS H KL Adj Bk C copy ratio correction offset 1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of copy ratio correction between Bk color and C color Enter the value of a C Bk color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left ima...

Page 608: ... to 4 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR LS INT V COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS V YC YR ML MC MR KL KC KR COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS V YC Adj Y C distortion correction offset 2 Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of distortion correction between Y color and C color Enter the value of a C Y color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left ...

Page 609: ...4 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER TEST PG TYPE COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR LS INT V COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS V YL YC YR ML MR KL KC KR COPIER ADJUST IMG REG LS V MR Adj M C distortion correction offset 3 Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of distortion correction between M color and C color Enter the value of a C M color set having the smallest degree of color displacement among the left imag...

Page 610: ...t printing For details refer to the situation mode or Adjustment in Chapter 5 of the Service Manual Use case When color displacement occurs at the center of an image especially at installation or at replacement of the Laser Scanner Unit Adj set operate method 1 Execute LS INT V 2 Output the corresponding PG 3 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When mak...

Page 611: ...ontroller PCB clearing of RAM data and then re entering the value after the processing is done Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When INISET C is executed the value is rewritten Display adj set range 0 to 1023 Default value 350 It may vary by initialization of the Developing Unit when clearing RAM data Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET C...

Page 612: ...y Support Division Display adj set range 4 to 4 Unit 0 5 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT PTY COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT PTM Adj M clr toner dens tgt VL upper limit Lv 2 Details To adjust the upper limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor M As the value is incremented by 1 the upper limit is increased by 0 5 Increase the value when a density fail...

Page 613: ...mode COPIER ADJUST DENS HLMT PTM COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT PTC Adj C clr toner dens tgt VL lower limit Lv 2 Details To adjust the lower limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor C As the value is incremented by 1 the lower limit is increased by 0 5 Increase the value when a density failure coarseness occurs and decrease the value when fogging scattering occurs In principle ...

Page 614: ...ust the offset of the M color ATR patch density target value When the target value determined upon initialization of the Developing Unit is changed the TD ratio is also changed Decrease the value when density increase occurs and increase the value when fogging occurs Use case When an image failure density failure fogging carrier adherence etc occurs Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value...

Page 615: ...ution Take necessary action in accordance with the instructions from the Quality Support Division Display adj set range 4 to 4 Unit 0 5 Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT PTK COPIER ADJUST DENS LLMT PTK Adj Bk clr toner dens tgt VL lower limit Lv 2 Details To adjust the lower limit of the toner density target value of the Toner Density Sensor Bk As the value is incremente...

Page 616: ...e mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET K 4 COPIER ADJUST DENS D Y LVL Entry of ATR patch Y clr correction VL Lv 1 Details To enter the Y color correction value of ATR patch The value is determined whenever the Developing Unit Y is initialized When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use case When checking the value before replacement of the DC Controll...

Page 617: ...is displayed on the screen Use case When the Patch Sensor fails to read the density When replacing the Patch Sensor When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data When backup restoration cannot be performed Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When the Patch Sensor is replaced execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment quick adjustment Display...

Page 618: ...d from the target value Display adj set range 0 to 1000 Unit 1 pixel Default value JP 0 USA 0 EUR 35 AU 0 CN 0 KR 0 TW 0 ASIA 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST BLANK BLANK B Supplement memo Blur at leading edge A phenomenon that the image leading edge on the 2nd side is blurred at 2 sided print It is likely to occur on image with high density Contact of curled portion of paper leading edge with...

Page 619: ...service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT Y C K Related user mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust COPIER ADJUST V CONT VCONT C Adj of C color contrast potential Lv 2 Details To adjust the contrast potential for C color As the value is changed by 1 the contrast potential is changed by 5 V Image becomes darker Image becomes lighter When the value is too la...

Page 620: ...l adjustment Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display adj set range 5 to 5 Unit 10 V Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK M C K Related user mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK M Adj M color fog removal potential 1 1SPD Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging...

Page 621: ...rvice mode COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK2 M C K Related user mode Adjustment Maintenance Adjust Image Quality Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust COPIER ADJUST V CONT VBACK2 M Adj M color fog removal potential 1 2SPD Lv 2 Details To adjust the offset of the fogging removal potential Vback for M color at 1 2 speed As the value is changed by 1 the fogging removal potential is changed by 10 V Fogging is a...

Page 622: ...N the main power switch Caution After the setting value is changed write the changed value in the service label Display adj set range 128 to 128 Default value According to the adjustment value of the Reader at factory shipment OFST P M M density adj at test print reading Lv 1 Details To adjust the offset of M color test print reading signal at Auto Adjust Gradation Full Adjust When replacing the S...

Page 623: ...J M Adjustment of color balance for M color Lv 1 Details To adjust the default value of the color balance for M color when the density of M color varies between devices As the value is larger the image gets darker If the value is too large a transfer failure and or a fixing failure occurs Use case Upon user s request to reduce density difference between devices Adj set operate method 1 Enter the s...

Page 624: ... case When the background of a document cannot be read correctly When removal of the background cannot be performed correctly and a fogging like image appears Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 32 to 32 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST COLOR OFST K Adj Bk clr brit area dens color b...

Page 625: ...tion and file storage Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage COPIER ADJUST COLOR LD OFS K Adj Bk low dens area clr balance copy Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted in Fine...

Page 626: ...eration and file storage Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage COPIER ADJUST COLOR MD OFS K Adj Bk mid dens area clr balance copy Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk color for copy operation As the value is larger the image gets darker A value obtained by adding the value adjusted i...

Page 627: ...just Density Supplement memo In the main menu different density values can be set for copy operation and file storage Although the setting value of this item is just one value the density may differ for copy operation and file storage COPIER ADJUST COLOR HD OFS K Adj Bk hi dens area clr balance copy Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the high density area of Bk color for copy operation As...

Page 628: ... to 8 Default value 0 Related user mode Access Stored Files Mail Box Print Change Print Settings Options Color Balance Fine Adjust Density COPIER ADJUST COLOR PL OFS K Adj Bk clr low dens area clr balance PDL Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the low density area of Bk color at PDL print The target data is the data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box As the value is la...

Page 629: ...e 8 to 8 Default value 0 Related user mode Access Stored Files Mail Box Print Change Print Settings Options Color Balance Fine Adjust Density COPIER ADJUST COLOR PM OFS K Adj Bk clr mid dens area clr balance PDL Lv 2 Details To adjust the color balance of the medium density area of Bk color at PDL print The target data is the data generated by the printer driver and stored in Mail Box As the value...

Page 630: ... setting value of this item is applied as the actual density value e g When the value of this item is 4 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 1 Note that the density value must be within the rage from 8 to 8 e g When the value of this item is 7 and the value of Fine Adjust Density is 5 the density value is 8 Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative ...

Page 631: ... setting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR2 Sec trns indiv setting paper type set 2 Lv 2 Details To set the paper type paper weight for setting 2 Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV2 TR ...

Page 632: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR4 Sec trns indiv setting paper type set 4 Lv 2 Details To set the paper type paper weight for setting 4 Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV4 TR PPR...

Page 633: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR6 Sec trns indiv setting paper type set 6 Lv 2 Details To set the paper type paper weight for setting 6 Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV6 TR PPR...

Page 634: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR8 Sec trns indiv setting paper type set 8 Lv 2 Details To set the paper type paper weight for setting 8 Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV8 TR PPR...

Page 635: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV3 Sec trns indiv setting environment set 3 Lv 2 Details To set the environment absolute moisture content for setting 3 Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in...

Page 636: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV7 Sec trns indiv setting environment set 7 Lv 2 Details To set the environment absolute moisture content for setting 7 Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in...

Page 637: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR DUP3 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 3 Lv 2 Details To set the color mode and feed side for setting 3 Setting 3 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV3 TR PP...

Page 638: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR DUP7 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 7 Lv 2 Details To set the color mode and feed side for setting 7 Setting 7 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV7 TR PP...

Page 639: ...EX COPIER ADJUST HV TR 1TR TGK1 Adj Bk pry trns ATVC tgt crrnt 1 1 speed Lv 2 Details To adjust the target current for Bk color upon primary transfer ATVC control at 1 1 speed Increase the value when low voltage mottled image occurs and decrease the value when fogging occurs especially in the 94 mm portion of the image leading edge The setting is reflected at the next primary transfer ATVC control...

Page 640: ... at the leading edge occurs Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution Use this item only when an image failure occurs Display adj set range 100 to 100 Unit 0 1 mm Appropriate target value 40 40 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST HV TR B2TR LNG Adj of trail edge weak bias apply length Lv 2 Details To adjust the length distance from the traili...

Page 641: ... where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR10 Sec trn indiv setting paper type set 10 Lv 2 Details To set the paper type paper weight for setting 10 Setting 10 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV10 TR PPR1...

Page 642: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR12 Sec trn indiv setting paper type set 12 Lv 2 Details To set the paper type paper weight for setting 12 Setting 12 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV12 TR...

Page 643: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR14 Sec trn indiv setting paper type set 14 Lv 2 Details To set the paper type paper weight for setting 14 Setting 14 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV14 TR...

Page 644: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR PPR16 Sec trn indiv setting paper type set 16 Lv 2 Details To set the paper type paper weight for setting 16 Setting 16 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV16 TR...

Page 645: ... where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV11 Sec trn indiv setting environment set 11 Lv 2 Details To set the environment absolute moisture content for setting 11 Setting 11 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in T...

Page 646: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR ENV15 Sec trn indiv setting environment set 15 Lv 2 Details To set the environment absolute moisture content for setting 15 Setting 15 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set...

Page 647: ... where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR DUP11 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 11 Lv 2 Details To set the color mode and feed side for setting 11 Setting 11 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV11 TR PP...

Page 648: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR DUP15 Sec trn indiv set clr mod fd side set 15 Lv 2 Details To set the color mode and feed side for setting 15 Setting 15 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV15 ...

Page 649: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL2 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 2 Lv 2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 2 Setting 2 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that a...

Page 650: ...tting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL4 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 4 Lv 2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 4 Setting 4 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that a...

Page 651: ...etting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL6 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 6 Lv 2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 6 Setting 6 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that ...

Page 652: ...etting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL8 Sec trns indiv set ppr allot voltg set 8 Lv 2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 8 Setting 8 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that ...

Page 653: ...ng where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL10 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg set 10 Lv 2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 10 Setting 10 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that a...

Page 654: ...etting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL12 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg set 12 Lv 2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 12 Setting 12 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side th...

Page 655: ...etting where all conditions environment paper type and color mode feed side are the same the setting with a smaller setting number is applied COPIER ADJUST HV TR TR VL14 Sec trn indiv set ppr allot voltg set 14 Lv 2 Details To adjust the paper allotted voltage of secondary transfer for setting 14 Setting 14 is the combination condition of environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side th...

Page 656: ... environment paper type paper weight color mode feed side that are set in TR ENV16 TR PPR16 and TR DUP16 When this condition is satisfied the paper allotted voltage adjusted here is applied at the time of secondary transfer If the setting of 2TR OFF is made the setting voltage is added to the paper allotted voltage Increase the value when low voltage mottled image or toner scattering on solid imag...

Page 657: ...50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C3 Write start pstn in horz scan Cassette 3 Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position in the horizontal scanning direction when feeding paper from the Cassette 3 Paper width is 320 mm or smaller As the value is changed by 1 the left margin is changed by 0 1 mm Left margin becomes larger An image moves to the right Left mar...

Page 658: ... value of service label Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 55 to 55 Unit 0 1 mm Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ ADJ C4RE Write start pstn in horz scan Cst4 2nd Lv 1 Details To adjust the image write start position on the second side in the horizo...

Page 659: ...pre rgst arch amount heavy Casstt Lv 1 Details To adjust the arch amount before registration for paper belonging to a group of heavy papers fed from a cassette As the value is changed by 1 the arch amount is changed by 0 1 mm Increase Decrease Use case When an image on the 1st side of paper belonging to a group of heavy papers fed from a cassette is skewed Adj set operate method Enter the setting ...

Page 660: ...method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 5 to 5 Unit 0 2 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST FEED ADJ EXT SPD Setting of delivery speed at 1 1 speed Lv 2 Details To set the delivery speed of papers thin paper 1 plain paper 1 2 3 colored paper 1 recycled paper 1 2 3 pre punched paper 1 and tracing paper which are fed at 1 1 speed in the case of...

Page 661: ... of Multi purpose Tray maximum width Lv 1 Details To adjust the maximum width of the Multi purpose Tray When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label When registering a new value execute COPIER FUNCTION CST MF MAX Use case When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data When registering a new value Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and ...

Page 662: ...urn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 2 to 2 Default value 1 COPIER ADJUST MISC ACS CNT Set jdgmt pixel count area in ACS mode Lv 2 Details To set the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color presence in ACS mode As the value is larger the judgment area is widened Use case When adjusting the area where the pixel is counted to judge the color presence in ACS mode Adj set ...

Page 663: ... lines due to charging may appear earlier When the value is decreased drum ghost may occur Display adj set range 100 to 100 Unit 1 Default value 0 COPIER ADJUST EXP LED PR EXP C Adj Cln Pre expo LED C intnsty 1 1SPD Lv 2 Details To adjust the light intensity of the Cleaning Pre exposure LED C at 1 1 speed To set the proportion relative to the current value in percentage Increase the value when dru...

Page 664: ...current value in percentage Increase the value when drum ghost occurs and decrease the value when horizontal lines appear due to charging Use case When drum ghost occurs When horizontal lines appear due to charging Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When the value is increased horizontal lines due to charging may appear earlier W...

Page 665: ... label included in the package of a new one When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data enter the value of service label Use case When replacing the Cleaning Pre exposure LED When replacing the DC Controller PCB clearing RAM data Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Use this item only when replacing the Cleaning Pre exposure LED or replacing the D...

Page 666: ...en operation finished normally OK Required time 150 sec Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL STIR Y M C 4 STIR 4 Stirring of all colors of developers Lv 1 Details To stir developer in the Developing Units of 4 colors Y M C Bk Use case When fogging occurs on an image after the machine has not been used for a long time Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj ...

Page 667: ...tion When installing the machine or replacing the Developing Unit of other color do not use this item Display adj set range During operation xxx second remaining time At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Required time 180 sec Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET Y C K 4 COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL INISET C Exe of Dev Unit C initial install mod Lv 1 Details To automaticall...

Page 668: ...hen press OK key Caution Be sure to use E RDS RGW PORT COM TEST COM LOG and RGW ADR as a set Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When connection is completed OK When connection is failed NG Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL E RDS RGW PORT COM LOG RGW ADR COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR ERDS DAT Supplement memo Embedded RDS Function to send device information such as the device counter f...

Page 669: ...ally execute operation necessary for initial installation of the Developing Units for all colors 1 Idle rotation of the Developing Unit including automatic take up of the developer sealing 2 Dark current correction of the Registration Patch Sensor and light intensity adjustment 3 Initialization of the Toner Density Sensors for all colors 4 Primary transfer ATVC control 5 Initialization of the Regi...

Page 670: ...case When replacing the Scanner Unit Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range At start of operation START During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Required time 10 sec COPIER FUNCTION INSTALL BIT SVC OFF ON of Web service function of E RDS Lv 1 Details To set whether to use Web service function of Embedded RDS When 0 is set authenticatio...

Page 671: ...n the MTF value of the DADF complex chart The MTF value is backed up in the Scanner Unit Since it is peculiar to the Scanner Unit there is no need to make an entry a change Use case When replacing the Scanner Unit When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally ...

Page 672: ... stopped at the fixing nip 10 seconds and then is automatically delivered 3 Measure the nip width Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK T 8 36 T 8 37 PANEL COPIER FUNCTION PANEL LCD CHK Checking of LCD Panel dot missing Lv 1 Details To check whether there are any missing dots on the LCD Panel of the Control Panel Use case When replacing the LCD Panel Adj...

Page 673: ...conds Use case When replacing the fan checking the operation Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Required time 1 min Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK FAN COPIER FUNCTION PART CHK MTR Specification of operation motor Lv 1 Details To specify the motor to operate Use case When repla...

Page 674: ...y 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK DC CON Clearing of DC Controller PCB RAM data Lv 1 Details To clear the RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Use case When clearing RAM data of the DC Controller PCB Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Output the...

Page 675: ...login application to Default Authentication once Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION MISC P P PRINT COPIER FUNCTION CLEAR CARD Clearing of card ID related data Lv 1 Details To clear the data related to the card ID department Use case When clearing the data related to the card ID Adj set operate method 1 Select the item and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution The data is ...

Page 676: ...fer to the Service Manual Use case When initializing the MEAP application Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Caution If you clear MEAP application which has been installed additionally be sure to reinstall it manually Supplement memo MEAP applications bundled as standard system application built in login application MEAP applications installed additionally non Canon made ...

Page 677: ...under the White Plate and the Copyboard Glass respectively Use case When replacing the LED Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK Required time 7 sec RD SHPOS Moving to Scanner Unit fixing position Lv 2 Details To move the Scanner Unit to the position where it is fixed when moving When moving th...

Page 678: ...ion finished normally OK COPIER FUNCTION MISC P PRE EXP Lighting up of Pre exposure LED Lv 1 Details To light up the Pre exposure LED Y M C Bk Remove the Photosensitive Drum for visual check Since the Pre exposure LED is not lighted up while the Front Door is open release the Interlock It automatically stops after all LEDs light up Use case When checking that the Pre exposure LEDs lights up Adj se...

Page 679: ...t The printer engine usually executes image position correction control at the specific timing according to the operation status and environment change Use case When removing the Drum Unit When releasing pressure from the ITB Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE When operation finished normally OK USBH PRT Output of USB device i...

Page 680: ... system check of the partition specified by CHK TYPE at the next startup Use case When E602 E614 error file corruption etc occurs Adj set operate method Enter 1 and then press OK key Caution Be sure to execute this item after CHK TYPE Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not executed 1 Executed at next startup Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER FUNCTION SYSTEM CHK TYPE HD CLEAR Initialization o...

Page 681: ... memory Lv 2 Details To store a set of debug logs to the USB memory at the error occurrence A type of log to be collected is set in LOG TRIG If there is a debug log which has been automatically saved it is archived at this time Required time differs according to the device conditions and volume of log data Use case When analyzing the cause of a problem Adj set operate method 1 Install the USB memo...

Page 682: ... log collection operation Use case When returning the device in which analyzing the cause of a problem was completed When resetting the debug log settings Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key LOG DEL Clearing of debug logs Lv 2 Details To delete the debug log file The debug log setting is not reset Use case When clearing the debug log Adj set operate method Select the item ...

Page 683: ...case When replacing the Scanner Unit When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 AB configuration 1 Inch configuration Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW CONFIG Set country regn lang location ppr size Lv 1 Details To set the country region language location ...

Page 684: ...of sheets is changed by 1 sheet Use case When matching the use environment of the user Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Increasing the number of sheets widening the interval causes higher frequency of image failure Display adj set range 50 to 2000 Unit 1 sheet Default value 1000 COPIER OPTION FNC SW DMAX SW ON OFF of...

Page 685: ...ied size so that an image can be formed properly Use case Upon user s request When picking up special paper size original from DADF Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 A4R 1 FOLIO R Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW PDF RDCT Set of PDF reduction at RX forwarding Lv 2 Details To set whether to r...

Page 686: ...ce technician Use case Upon request from the user who concerns security Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 No password 1 Service technician 2 System administrator service technician Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW SM PSWD Set of password for service technician Lv 2 Details To set password fo...

Page 687: ...ress OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed Default value 1 Supplement memo CDS Contents Delivery System COPIER OPTION FNC SW CDS UGW Set to allow firmware update from UGW Lv 1 Details To set whether to allow firmware update from the UGW server When 1 is set Updater accepts the operation from the UGW server in cooperation with CDS Use case Wh...

Page 688: ...ption operation mode Default value 0 COPIER OPTION FNC SW PDL Z LG Setting of drawing algorithm Lv 1 Details To switch the drawing algorithm of the iR C series and the iR ADV C series to obtain output expected by the user When 0 is set image is output as displayed on the screen by the new algorithm adopted from the iR ADV C Series Pseudo outline boundary for processing divided graphics separately ...

Page 689: ...ASCII can be written exists in order to link with the value on the Control Panel This violates RFC order so a problem like garbled 2 byte characters may occur in the SNMP monitoring system such as other vendor s MPS Whether to allow writing of non RFC compatible character strings in MIB can be set using this item When 1 is set only the character strings which are strictly compatible with RFC are w...

Page 690: ...ount some errors may occur Display adj set range 0 to 40 Unit 1 Default value It differs according to the location Related service mode COPIER OPTION FNC SW T DLV BK COPIER OPTION FNC SW D DLV BK Set Bk Drum prior dvry alarm notice tmg Lv 1 Details To set the timing to notify the prior delivery alarm for the Drum Unit Bk Use case When changing the timing to notify the end of life according to the ...

Page 691: ...r a location other than the intended one Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 For Japan 1 For locations other than Japan and USA 2 For USA Default value JP 0 USA 2 EUR 1 AU 1 CN 1 KR 1 TW 1 ASIA 1 COPIER OPTION FNC SW VER CHNG Setting of firmware update operation Lv 2 Details To set how to update firmware of PCB option which has been i...

Page 692: ...tial rotation time when feeding extra long size paper When the result is a negative value the time becomes 0 second Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the edge and decrease the value when prioritizing productivity Use case When a fixing failure occurs on the edge while feeding extra long size paper When reducing downtime Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negativ...

Page 693: ...old value for the toner level in the Toner Bottle When the toner level becomes below the threshold while TNR WARN is 0 a warning message Toner is low Replacement not yet needed is displayed on the Control Panel As the value is incremented by 1 the threshold is increased by 1 As the value is larger the timing to display the message becomes earlier Use case Upon user s request At the timing that the...

Page 694: ... Set hvy prntr 1200dpi dedicated mod dspl Lv 1 Details To set whether to display heavy paper and printer 1200 dpi dedicated mode on Auto Adjust Gradation screen at the time of full adjustment Use case When executing full adjustment with heavy paper and printer 1200 dpi dedicated mode Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display ...

Page 695: ...ning time Default value 0 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW USER DSP Set of SSO H login user name display Lv 1 Details To set whether to display the name of the user who logs in using MEAP authentication SSO H on the upper left area of the Control Panel screen Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj se...

Page 696: ...efault value It differs according to the location Related user mode Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings Supplement memo Display order of paper name on the paper settings screen differs according on the location The area specific standard size paper cannot be set for both the Cassette 1 and 2 for the 1 cassette model for China T 8 46 IMG FIX COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FX S TMP Set ITOP control tem...

Page 697: ...when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing offset occurs Use case When a fixing failure fixing offset occurs on thin paper Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit 5 deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL6 Set fixing control ...

Page 698: ...r on the leading edge of paper Toner does not peel off Display adj set range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit 5 deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP5 Set ITOP control temperature thin paper Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for thin paper As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Decrease the va...

Page 699: ...extend the life of the Fixing Unit Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When 1 is set FCOT becomes longer Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 ON 1 OFF Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TBL7 Set fix ctrl temp plain 2 tracing punch Lv 1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for plain paper 2 76 to 90 g...

Page 700: ...eg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit 5 deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TMP8 Set ITOP control temp transparency Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for transparency As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use...

Page 701: ...ure crawled marks wrinkles occurs Use case When an image failure crawled marks wrinkles occurs with thin paper Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 2 to 2 2 0 mm 1 15 mm 0 35 mm 1 60 mm 2 85 mm Default value 0 Supplement memo Image failure crawled marks A symptom that image is blurred in the feeding direction and it o...

Page 702: ...g C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit 5 deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB11 Set fixing control temp recycled paper 1 Lv 1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for recycled paper 1 64 to 75 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Increase the value when a fixing failure occurs and decrease the value when fixing ...

Page 703: ...key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper Toner does not peel off Display adj set range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit 5 deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TM13 Set ITOP control temp recycled paper 2 Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temper...

Page 704: ... OPTION IMG FIX FXS TM16 Set ITOP control temp heavy paper 4 Lv 1 Details To set the offset of ITOP control temperature for heavy paper 4 221 to 256 g m2 As the value is changed by 1 the control temperature is changed by 5 deg C Decrease the value when uneven gloss occurs and increase the value when a fixing failure occurs on the leading edge of paper Use case When uneven gloss a fixing failure oc...

Page 705: ...ter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution If the value is too large uneven gloss may occur If the value is too small a fixing failure may occur on the leading edge of paper Toner does not peel off Display adj set range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit 5 deg C Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION IMG FIX FXS TM18 COPI...

Page 706: ...ay adj set range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit 5 deg C Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB22 COPIER OPTION IMG FIX TMP TB22 Set fixing control temp extra long hvy 2 Lv 1 Details To set the offset of fixing control temperature for extra long heavy paper 1 2 3 4 coated paper 1 2 3 and label width 305 1 to 320 mm As the value is changed ...

Page 707: ... AUTO DH Set Dmax Dhalf ctrl exe cndtn wrmup rtn Lv 1 Details To set the condition to additionally execute D max D half control at warm up rotation after the machine is not used for 8 hours or more When 0 is set additional execution of D max D half control is not performed When 1 is set additional execution is performed only in an HH high temperature and high humidity environment When 2 is set add...

Page 708: ...s gets worse Use case While printing low duty low image ratio images When graininess coarseness or decrease in density occurs When low productivity or high toner consumption is pointed out by the user Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display adj set range 2 to 4 2 1 0 1 0 5 0 0 0 1 0 5 2 1 0 3 1 5 4 2 0 Unit Default value 0 COPIER OPTI...

Page 709: ...gh auto gradation adjustment is executed Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 3 Execute auto gradation adjustment full adjustment Display adj set range 3 to 3 Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DMX OF M Adj of M color D max target density Lv 2 Details To adjust the target density of D max control in...

Page 710: ... Use case When horizontal lines appear in the area of 47 mm from the leading edge Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution Do not use this when the machine is operating correctly Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 Not formed 1 Formed depending on conditions 2 Always formed Default value 1 COPIER OPTION IMG DEV DELV DNS ON OFF of soiled paper edge prevention Lv 2 Det...

Page 711: ...ar on the image if there is dust With dust detection correction control the image is corrected to prevent black lines once dust is detected COPIER OPTION IMG RDR DFDST L2 DADF mode dust dtct level adj after job Lv 1 Details To adjust dust detection level with dust detection correction control that is executed after the job is completed in DADF mode Reduce the value in the case of frequent display ...

Page 712: ...low dot stability color mode Large granularity high dot stability black mode 2 Large granularity high dot stability Default value 2 COPIER OPTION IMG MCON PRN FLG Select of image area flag PDL image Lv 2 Details To set the image area flag for image processing which is performed when a PDL image fails to be compressed at a specified compression rate If an image fails to be compressed at a specified...

Page 713: ...OPTION IMG MCON DH MODE Set ptch data at Dhalf except full adj Lv 2 Details To set whether to use the high density patch data that has been scanned by D half control of full adjustment at the time of D half control other than full adjustment Use case At image adjustment Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range ...

Page 714: ... 3 if no smoothing effect is obtained even though High is set in the advanced smoothing UI Set 0 if too much effect is obtained even though Low is set in the advanced smoothing UI Use case When image failures jaggy moire occur Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 3 Default value 2 Supplement memo AST A...

Page 715: ...wer switch Display adj set range 2 to 2 2 10 deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit 5 deg C Default value 0 COPIER OPTION IMG SPD ARC INT1 Set ARCDAT control interruption interval Lv 2 Details To set the number of sheets as the intervals at which ARCDAT control is executed When the number of sheets reaches the specified value the control is executed at paper intervals by interrupting ...

Page 716: ...ed together with the toner every time after feeding 10 sheets at paper interval and 5 sheets at last rotation As the value is changed by 1 the number of sheets at paper interval and last rotation is changed by 1 sheet When the value is decreased in the case of using transparency to which surface active agent is more likely to be adhered image failure can be alleviated When the value is increased d...

Page 717: ...in vertical scanning direction appear at approx 30 mm from the image leading edge Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution FCOT becomes approx 1 second longer Display adj set range 0 to 2 0 18 deg C or lower 1 2 speed 1 18 deg C or lower 1 1 speed 1 2 speed 2 Whole temperature range 1 1 speed 1 2 speed Default value 0 COPIER OPTION ENV SET INTRTMPH Set initial r...

Page 718: ...f envelope adheres Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Caution When 1 is set in a low humidity environment fixing performance is decreased Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 1 2 speed 1 1 1 speed Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION FEED SW EVLP FS PINT REG Set img pstn crrct exe frqcy ppr intvl Lv 2 Details To set the frequency to execute image position ...

Page 719: ... Display adj set range 0 to 65535 Default value 25 COPIER OPTION NETWORK POP3PN Setting of POP3 reception port number Lv 2 Details To set POP3 reception port number Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 65535 Default value 110 FTPTXPN Specify SEND destination port FTP No Lv ...

Page 720: ...Protocol in which user authentication function is added to SMTP which is the protocol to be used for e mail transmission At the time of e mail transmission this protocol executes authentication of the user account and the password between the SMTP server and the user to approve e mail transmission only when it s authenticated COPIER OPTION NETWORK NS LGN Limit LOGIN authentication SMTP auth Lv 2 D...

Page 721: ...eep mode again Use case When setting the startup time after sleep notification Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 1 to 600 Unit 1 sec Default value 15 IFX CHIG Set operation by IFAX recv e mail text Lv 1 Details To set the number of characters for the IFAX received e mail text so that the e mail is not pr...

Page 722: ...wer switch Display adj set range 10 to 120 Unit 1 sec Default value 30 IKERETRY Setting of IKE retry times Lv 1 Details To set the number of retries in the case of no response from the communication target at the time of IKE packet transmission Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set ran...

Page 723: ...n press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution When 1 is set the number of logs is increased because logs of packets which have no direct relation to the machine are recorded Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Unicast packets to the machine only 1 All packets Default value 0 COPIER OPTION NETWORK ILOGKEEP Set of time not recording IP block log Lv 1 Details To set the period of time not rec...

Page 724: ...0 No periodical update 1 1 hour 2 2 hours 47 47 hours 48 48 hours Unit 1 hour Default value 24 Supplement memo DDNS Dynamic Domain Name System A system to dynamically register manage the IP address and its host name which are assigned dynamically COPIER OPTION NETWORK PRCLTYPE Setting of dedicated protocol type Lv 2 Details To set the type of dedicated protocol CPCA protocol When 1 is set only the...

Page 725: ...ay adj set range 0 to 1 0 ASCII mode 1 BIN mode Default value 0 SSLMODE Setting of HTTP HTTPS port open close Lv 2 Details To set whether to open or close HTTP HTTPS port When 1 is set while Use HTTP is ON and SSL Settings is OFF in Settings Registration menu HTTP port is opened whereas HTTPS port is closed When 2 is set while both Use HTTP and SSL Settings are ON in Settings Registration menu HTT...

Page 726: ... deg C 1 5 deg C 0 0 deg C 1 5 deg C 2 10 deg C Unit deg C Default value 0 SC L CNT Set large paper jdgmt reference at scan Lv 1 Details To set the criteria for the scan counter to count which paper size whether B4 or LTR as large size The threshold is determined by the combination with the setting of B4 L CNT SC L CNT 0 B4 L CNT 0 paper exceeding B4 is determined as large size paper with B4 or sm...

Page 727: ...fault value 00000000 COPIER OPTION CUSTOM DEV SP7 Device special settings 7 Lv 2 Details To execute the device special setting Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this setting only when specific instructions are given Display adj set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 00000000 DEV SP8 Device special settings 8...

Page 728: ...n power switch Caution Use this mode only when specific instructions are given Display adj set range 00000000 to 11111111 Default value 0 RDEV SP5 RCON device special settings 5 Lv 2 Details To execute the device special setting Use case For customization Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution Use this mode only when speci...

Page 729: ...v 1 Details To set counter type for software counter 2 on the Counter Check screen Use case Upon user dealer s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 999 0 No registration Default value It differs according to the location COPIER OPTION USER COUNTER3 Setting of software counter 3 Lv 1 Details To ...

Page 730: ...j set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 No charge 1 Charge Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION ACC COIN B4 L CNT Count setting of B4 size Lv 1 Details To set B4 count with software counter 1 to 8 as to whether B4 is counted as large size or small size When 1 is set B4 or larger size paper...

Page 731: ... ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER P CRG LF ON OFF of Drum Unit life warning display Lv 1 Details To set whether to display a warning message when the Drum Unit reaches its life When 1 is set a warning message is displayed on the status line of the Control Panel seven days later that the value of Y M C K DRM LF reached the setting v...

Page 732: ...Copy Change Default Settings Initialize Function Settings Copy Select Color Settings for Copy Use Auto Color Black White COPIER OPTION USER DFLT BOX Setting of color mode for Mail Box scan Lv 1 Details To set the default color mode for Mail Box scan operation To reflect the change it is necessary to initialize the default settings of scan and store function in one of the following two ways Setting...

Page 733: ...tings Maximum Data Size for Sending Supplement memo Set the upper limit value for transmission data size in Settings Registration menu COPIER OPTION USER MEAPSAFE Setting of MEAP safe mode Lv 2 Details To set safe mode for MEAP platform MPSF is displayed on the Control Panel in safe mode In safe mode MEAP application is stopped while just the system application which starts with initial state is a...

Page 734: ... Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 Supplement memo Connection Connection to be established through network between multiple hosts PC etc Job grouping function A function of imageWARE Output Manager Select Edition V1 0 It enables to prevent job interruption from other PC ...

Page 735: ...m Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON 32 specification restrictions with Bit definition Bit0 Function to obtain image file 0 OFF 1 ON Bit1 Function to compose form registration 0 OFF 1 ON Bit2 Function to edit document 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 Related service mode COPIER OPTION USER JA FUNC COPIER OPTION USER LDAP SW Set of search condition for LDAP server Lv 1 Details To set the condition t...

Page 736: ... 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Caution To restrict addresses for transmission be sure to manually delete them because the addresses registered in the Address Book can be used Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Allowed 1 Prohibited Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER LDAP DEF Set of LDAP server ini search attribute Lv 1 Details To set initial condition for search attribute that is specified at the...

Page 737: ... 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 1 Related user mode Management Settings Data Management HDD Data Complete Deletion Hard Disk Data Complete Deletion BWCL DSP ON OFF of color B W selection screen COPIER OPTION USER Lv 2 Details To set whether to display the color B W selection screen to select the default of the color mode Use case When disp...

Page 738: ...n power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 1 USBB DSP For R D USBR DSP ON OFF USB infrared devc MEAP driver use Lv 2 Details To set whether to display Use MEAP Driver for USB Infrared Device in Settings Registration menu When 1 is set whether to use MEAP driver can be selected on USB Settings screen Use case When allowing the user administrator to select whether to use th...

Page 739: ...g value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Prohibited 1 Allowed Default value 0 COPIER OPTION USER JA FORM Setting of image composition SAM Lv 2 Details To set whether to allow image composition when iW SAM is enabled Use case When canceling the operation restriction while iW SAM is enabled Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and t...

Page 740: ...0 OFF 1 ON Default value 1 COPIER OPTION USER SMD EXPT ON OFF remote UI service mode data dspl Lv 1 Details To set whether to display service mode data as the target data of export on remote UI When 1 is set the same service mode data can be registered in the case of installing more than a machine at the same time Use case When installing more than a machine at the same time Adj set operate method...

Page 741: ...t print PDF Lv 2 Details To set output paper size at direct print PDF Usually the region defined by MediaBox is output However in some cases the region defined trimmed by CropBox is judged as output paper size depending on PDF file Set 1 when output result differs from what is defined at direct print PDF Use case When preferring to output a PDF file with paper which size is defined by CropBox whil...

Page 742: ...lay adj set range 0 to 1 0 A5R 1 STMTR Default value JP 0 USA 1 EUR 0 AU 0 CN 0 KR 0 TW 0 ASIA 0 Related user mode Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings A5R STMTR Paper Selection COPIER OPTION CST CST K SW Set of EXEC 16K size support Cassette 1 Lv 2 Details To set whether to support EXEC or 16K size K size paper by the Cassette 1 This setting is enabled only for the location where K size pape...

Page 743: ...R CONTROL AFN PSWD 1 COPIER OPTION NETWORK DA CNCT 1 COPIER OPTION DSPLY SW UI BOX UI SEND UI FAX 0 IE Settings IE Function Priority ON Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv4 Settings IP Address Range Settings RX Print Range Allow IPv4 Address ON Preferences Network TCP IP Settings IPv6 Settings IP Address Range Settings RX Print Range Allow IPv6 Address ON Preferences Network TCP IP Settings FT...

Page 744: ...NIT PRC Setting of Coin Manager currency unit Lv 2 Details To set currency unit to be handled with Coin Manager Use case At installation of Coin Manager Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 6 0 Japanese yen 1 Euro 2 Pound 3 Swiss Franc 4 Dollar 5 No currency unit no fractional unit 6 No currency unit w...

Page 745: ... number of sheets Default value 0 PDL THR ON OFF PDL print external charge mode Lv 2 Details To set whether to execute normal PDL print when COIN is set to external charge mode 6 7 Use case When executing normal PDL print in external charge mode Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default...

Page 746: ...PDF Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST SPDF Inst state dspl searchable PDF TX func Lv 2 Details To display installation state of searchable PDF transmission function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether searchable PDF transmission function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST SPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When inst...

Page 747: ...BarDIMM function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of BarDIMM when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether BarDIMM is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST BRDIM 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has been completed the transfer license key is displayed under TR BRDIM Display adj set range When operation finished normally OK Defaul...

Page 748: ...al SEND function when the function is disabled with license transfer Use case When replacing the device Adj set operate method 1 Select ST TRSND 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR TRSND Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST WTMRK Install state dspl of secure watermark Lv 2 Details To display installation state of secure watermark funct...

Page 749: ...n has been installed Use case When replacing the device Adj set operate method 1 Select ST DVPDF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR DVPDF Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST SCPDF Install state dspl trace smooth PDF TX Lv 2 Details To display installation state of trace smooth PDF transmission function when disabling the function wit...

Page 750: ...r license key is displayed under TR PS Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PCL Install state display of PCL function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PCL function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether PCL function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST PCL 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key When installation has bee...

Page 751: ...ransfer license key is displayed under TR PSPCL Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST PCLUF Install state dspl PCL UFR II function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of PCL UFR II function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether PCL UFR II function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST PCLUF 2 Enter 0 and then press OK k...

Page 752: ...e key is displayed under TR HDCR2 Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST JBLK Inst state dspl Document Scan Lock func Lv 2 Details To display installation state of Document Scan Lock function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether Document Scan Lock function is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST JBLK 2 Enter 0 and then press OK ...

Page 753: ...OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR XPS Display adj set range 24 digits COPIER OPTION LCNS TR ST 2600 Inst state dspl IEEE2600 1 scrty func Lv 2 Details To display installation state of security function of IEEE2600 1 when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether security function of IEEE2600 1 is installed Adj set operate method 1 Select ST 260...

Page 754: ...method 1 Select ST NCAPT 2 Enter 0 and then press OK key The transfer license key is displayed under TR NCAPT Display adj set range 24 digits ST U RDS Install state display of E RDS function Lv 2 Details To display installation state of Embedded RDS function when disabling the function with license transfer Use case When checking whether Embedded RDS function is installed Adj set operate method 1 ...

Page 755: ...setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Used 1 Not used DENS Y Adj of Y color density at test print Lv 1 Details To adjust Y color density when performing test print TYPE 5 As the value is larger the image gets darker Use case At test print TYPE 5 Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 255 Default value 128 DENS M ...

Page 756: ...j set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Not output 1 Output Default value 1 Related service mode COPIER TEST PG COLOR Y M C F M SW Setting of PG full color single color Lv 1 Details To set whether to output PG in full color or single color Use case When identifying the cause whether it s due to full color or single color Adj set operate met...

Page 757: ...rk setting of this machine and NIC are normal Inform the system administrator that the trouble is due to network environment and ask for countermeasure NG Connection failure fault with NIC Check connection of NIC replace NIC Display adj set range 0 0 0 0 to 255 255 255 255 At normal state OK At failure occurrence NG Supplement memo Remote host address IP address of PC terminal in network Loopback ...

Page 758: ...work Store Network Packet Log COPIER TEST NET CAP PAYLOAD Set network packet capture data save Lv 2 Details To set whether to discard payload when saving the captured packet data Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Save captured packet data as is 1 Discard payload and save the packet data Default ...

Page 759: ...ode indicates that a jam occurs somewhere other than the specified position Setting of forcible stop is enabled until paper stops at the specified position The setting is disabled for job where paper does not pass through the specified position Unfixed toner may be adhered on paper depending on the stop position Thus handle it with care Display adj set range 0 to 255 0 Not forcibly stopped 20 Pre ...

Page 760: ...count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at FAX reception Large size 1 Small size 1 Use case When checking the counter Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 BOX PRT Inbox print counter Lv 1 Details To count up when the printout is delivered outside the machine according to the charge counter at Inbox print Large size 1 Small size 1 Use case When che...

Page 761: ...the pickup counter Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit 1 sheet Default value 0 MF Multi purpose Tray pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Use case When checking the pickup counter Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit 1 sheet 2 SIDE 2 sided pickup total counter Lv 1 Details Large size 1 Small size 1 Use case When checking the pickup counter Display adj set range 0 to...

Page 762: ...to 99999999 Unit 1 time MF Multi purpose Tray jam counter Lv 1 Details To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Multi purpose Tray Use case When checking the jam counter of the Multi purpose Tray Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit 1 time C1 Cassette 1 pickup jam counter Lv 1 Details To count up the number of jam occurrences in the Cassette 1 Use case When checking the jam counter of ...

Page 763: ... ALLPW ON For R D HDD ON Number of hard disk start up times Lv 1 Details To count up when power of the hard disk is turned ON Use case When judging whether to shift the machine to power saving state after using the printer or scanner for a job Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 ST NDL Staple needle counter Lv 1 Details To count the use of the staple needle Unit 1 time ENT PTH Entrance paper path ...

Page 764: ...key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit 1 sheet Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 2TR ROLL Sec Transfer Outer Roller parts counter Lv 1 Details Secondary Transfer Outer Roller 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Ad...

Page 765: ...s OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit 1 sheet Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 C1 PU RL Cassette 1 Pickup Roller parts counter Lv 1 Details Cassette 1 Pickup Roller 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj s...

Page 766: ...hen press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit 1 sheet Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 M PU RL Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roll prts cntr Lv 1 Details Multi purpose Tray Pickup Roller 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacin...

Page 767: ...OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit 1 sheet Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 FX LW BS Fix Press Roll Shaft Support prts cntr Lv 1 Details Fixing Pressure Roller Shaft Support 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the p...

Page 768: ...replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit 1 sheet Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 1 PT DR M Drum Unit M parts counter Lv 1 Details Drum Unit M 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter value Select the item and then pres...

Page 769: ...press Clear key To change the estimated life value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Default value 0 R DOOR Right Door Unit parts counter Lv 1 Details Right Door Unit 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use case When checking the consumption...

Page 770: ...r the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit 1 time Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 DF HNG L Left Hinge parts counter DADF Lv 1 Details Left Hinge DADF 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use case When checking the consumption level of parts replacing the parts Adj set operate method To clear the counter v...

Page 771: ...fe value Select the item enter the value and then press OK key Caution Clear the counter value after replacement Display adj set range 0 to 99999999 Unit 1 sheet Default value 0 COPIER COUNTER DRBL 2 C4 FD RL Cassette 4 Feed Roller parts counter Lv 1 Details Cassette 4 Feed Roller 1st line Total counter value from the previous replacement 2nd line Estimated life value Use case When checking the co...

Page 772: ...o LOW less than 3 MID 3 or higher and less than 7 HIGH 7 or higher Use case When checking the distribution of user s video count Adj set operate method N A Display only Supplement memo Video count The number of sheets for each image ratio classification LOW MID HIGH for each color on a A4 size conversion basis which is stored in the controller A sheet of large size paper with 5 image ratio is coun...

Page 773: ...or higher and less than 7 HIGH 7 or higher Use case When checking the distribution of user s video count Adj set operate method N A Display only Supplement memo Video count The number of sheets for each image ratio classification LOW MID HIGH for each color on a A4 size conversion basis which is stored in the controller A sheet of large size paper with 5 image ratio is counted as small size with 5...

Page 774: ... To display how much the Drum Unit Y is close to the end of life in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 Use case When checking the life of Drum Unit Display adj set range 0 to 999 Unit 1 M DRM LF Display of Drum Unit M life Lv 1 Details To display how much the Drum Unit M is close to the end of life in percentage When a new part is set the value becomes 0 Use case When checking t...

Page 775: ...replacing the Scanner Unit When clearing the RAM data of the Reader Unit Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Caution When setting an extreme value the error E302 shading error may occur Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Default value 0 LA SPEED Fine adj img magnifictn DADF vert scan Lv 1 Details To adjust the image magnification ...

Page 776: ...r Related service mode FEEDER FUNCTION CL CHK FEEDER FUNCTION SL CHK Specifying DADF Operation Solenoid Lv 1 Details To specify the DADF solenoid to be operate The solenoid is activated by SL ON Use case At operation check Adj set operate method Enter the value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 Disengagement Solenoid SL1 1 Stamp Solenoid SL2 Related service mode FEEDER FUNCTION ...

Page 777: ...ER FUNCTION FEED ON Operation check of DADF individual feed Lv 1 Details To start operation check for the feed mode specified by FEED CHK Use case At operation check Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Related service mode FEEDER FUNCTION FEED CHK T 8 79 ...

Page 778: ...SORTER ADJUST STP R2 Adj rear 1 staple pstn R size Fin U1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the rear 1 staple position on A4R LGL LTRR paper As the value is changed by 1 the staple position is moved by 0 49 mm Toward rear Toward front Use case When the A4R LGL LTRR paper rear staple position is displaced Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press OK key Display a...

Page 779: ...W CL is disabled Use case When upward curl occurs on the paper delivered to the Stack Tray and paper leaning due to the curl occurs Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 Related service mode SORTER ADJUST DW CL SORTER ADJUST DW CL Setting downward curl prev mode Fin U1 Lv 1 Details To set ON OFF of downward curl...

Page 780: ...set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 Related service mode SORTER ADJUST TRY SU SORTER ADJUST TRY SU Set tray switching speedup mode Fin U1 Lv 1 Details To set ON OFF of tray switching speed up mode Set to 1 when the time for switching the stack tray is long When 1 is set the stack tray shift speed becomes faster and the productivity improves When tray switching noise reduction mode TRY NIS ...

Page 781: ...range 50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Default value 0 THN STCL Not used SORTER ADJUST FR ST PS Adjust staple free pressure Fin G1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the staple pressure in the staple free stapling mode As the value is changed by 1 the staple pressure changes by 1 mNm Increased Decreased Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method Enter the setting value switch negative positive by key and press O...

Page 782: ...e completion of adjustment 6 Remove the paper on the Processing Tray Display adj set range 50 to 50 Unit 0 1 mm Default value 0 Related service mode SORTER ADJUST INF ALG2 Supplement memo The adjustment result is reflected in SORTER ADJUST INF ALG2 SORTER ADJUST INF ALG2 Adj alignment position LTR Fin G1 Lv 1 Details To adjust the position of the Alignment Plate when aligning LTR paper As the valu...

Page 783: ...ecking the operation of the replaced motor Adj set operate method Enter the value and then press OK key Caution When setting the staple motor Fin U1 G1 and the stitcher motor front rear Fin U1 remove the staple cartridge When the staple cartridge is installed the motor is not driven Display adj set range Fin U1 1 to 24 Fin G1 1 to 11 1 Inlet motor Fin U1 Feed motor Fin G1 2 Front aligning plate mo...

Page 784: ... case When performance of the staple free stapler is deteriorated Adj set operate method Select the item and then press OK key Display adj set range During operation ACTIVE At normal termination OK At abnormal termination NG Supplement memo The removed paper dust accumulates on the lower frame under the paper path so it does not influence to the machine performance The part counter value of the st...

Page 785: ...o 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 SORTER OPTION PRCS SP3 Set the feed speed to Proc Tray Fin U1 Lv 1 Details To set the feeding speed of the paper to the Processing Tray in the staple mode As the value is increased by 1 the feeding speed is decelerated by 50 mm sec Use case When misalignment buckling on the trailing edge occurs in staple mode owing to returning the paper too much Adj set operate meth...

Page 786: ... free staple position Fin G1 Lv 1 Details To set the staple position of staple free stapling When 1 is set staple position becomes the center so paper is more likely to be come off The staple position moves to the delivery direction for 4 0 mm and the alignment direction for 2 0 mm inside Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method Enter the setting value and then press OK key Display adj ...

Page 787: ...ge 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 FR ST SW Stp free Stp Set in No Stp Ctrdg Fin G1 Lv 1 Details When the staple cartridge is absent staple free stapling is not actually performed in the default setting while a job with staple free stapling has executed since the finisher behaves in non sort mode Set to 1 to enable the staple free stapling without staple cartridge Use case When utilize the stapl...

Page 788: ...thod 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power switch Display adj set range 0 to 1 0 OFF 1 ON Default value 0 MENU 3 ON OFF printer setting menu level 3 dspl Lv 2 Details To set whether to display the level 3 of printer setting menu Use case Upon user s request Adj set operate method 1 Enter the setting value and then press OK key 2 Turn OFF ON the main power swi...

Page 789: ... Copy Tray J2 Copy Card Reader F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit B4 Utility Tray A2 Stamp Unit B1 Voice Operation Kit C2 USB Device Port E4 Voice Guidance Kit F2 Voice Guidance Connection Kit for iR ADV C3300 series Document Scan Lock Kit B1 Serial Intreface KIT K2 Copy Control Interface KIT A1 Combination of HDD Options ...

Page 790: ...fore Installation Following shows requirements for the installation site Therefore it is desirable to see the installation site in advance before bringing in the machine to the user s site Checking Power Supply 1 There must be a power outlet properly grounded and rated as indicated 10 for exclusive use by the machine Checking the Installation Environment 1 The environment of the installation site ...

Page 791: ...ance from the wall to make enough room for performing the operation When option is not installed 1117mm 957mm 500 mm or more 100 mm or more 500 mm or more 500 mm or more F 9 3 When the Booklet Finisher U1 is installed 1117mm 1607mm 100 mm or more 500 mm or more 500 mm or more 500 mm or more 3 Install the machine in a well ventilated location In a location with a mixture of multiple host machines b...

Page 792: ...lled of the host machine Before installing the following options refer to the table to check the combination of options When using options and the Copy Card Reader together install the Copy Card Reader first To install the Copy Card Reader the Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit is required Copy Control Interface Kit Serial Interface Kit Utility Tray Voice Operation Kit Voice Guidance Kit Copy Card Re...

Page 793: ...e space for the work than shown in the figure below Configuration of the host machine Height of body 1 Height necessary for work 2 Reader 1060mm or more 2120mm or more Reader DADF 1115mm or more 2300mm or more Reader Platen Cover 1095mm or more 2190mm or more T 9 2 765 mm 1 1 2 695 mm F 9 5 2 3 Holding the 4 handles lift the host machine down from the pallet CAUTION The maximum weight of the machi...

Page 794: ...Be sure not to remove the Scanner System Fixation Screw before installation of the scanner Only if the reader is installed Be sure to remove the tapes on the Full Sensor in the following procedure Other Installations F 9 8 F 9 9 5 Open the DADF if the machine has the DADF and remove the cushioning material from the copyboard section 2 pieces of tape 6 Close the DADF if the machine has the DADF F 9...

Page 795: ...r 6 Tray Guide Inner Finisher Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher NOTE The Touch Pen is attached to the Control Panel 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 2x 4x 230V 230V 120V Australia Only 10 1 11 2 12 3 13 4 14 5 15 6 18 16 17 7 8 9 1x 1x Latin America Only 1x Latin America Only 11 12 The connector has a different shape depending on locations Use the 1 correct power cable to match the location area...

Page 796: ...assette Feeding Unit at the same time When installing them at the same time be sure to make the Cassette Feeding Unit ready before mounting the host machine onto it If the Cassette Feeding Unit is not installed at the same time carry out the work from Installing the Toner Container in this manual Installation Outline Drawing Host Machine Cassette Feeding Unit F 9 12 Unpacking 1 CAUTION Hold the le...

Page 797: ...s Although pictures or illustrations used for explanation may differ from the actual things the procedure is the same 2 Perform steps 3 to 5 in each cassette F 9 14 3 CAUTION Do not operate the Trail Edge Guide Plate Side Guide Plate without pulling out the cassette Otherwise it may be damaged Trail Edge Guide Plate Side Guide Plate F 9 15 NOTE Remove tapes attached to the cassette and remove the ...

Page 798: ...ntents Cassette Feeding Unit Installation imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3300 Installation Procedure Checking the Contents Cassette Feeding Unit 4 NOTE Remove the Fixation Members from the Cassette 3 and Cassette 4 5 F 9 17 F 9 18 6 Checking the Contents Cassette Feeding Unit 1x 3x 2x 1x F 9 19 F 9 20 ...

Page 799: ...stalling the Cassette Feeding Unit 1 CAUTION If mounting the host machine without opening the Right Cover Lower the cover may get damage F 9 21 2 Holding the 4 handles set it on to the pedestal by aligning the corners right and left at the front side of the host machine with the corners right and left of the front side of the equipment CAUTION Do not mount the host machine with the cables inside t...

Page 800: ...on the Cassette Feeding Unit position the host machine parallel with the Cassette Feeding Unit and fit the 2 Positioning Pins on top of the Cassette Feeding Unit into the holes in the Base Plate of the host machine The maximum weight of the host machine is approx 71 kg Be sure to perform the work in accordance with the standard to handle a heavy load in each country Be sure to keep the machine lev...

Page 801: ...on Procedure Installing the Cassette Feeding Unit Installation imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3300 Installation Procedure Installing the Cassette Feeding Unit 4 NOTE The removed cover will be used in step 6 F 9 25 5 2x 2x 6 NOTE Use the cover removed in step 4 F 9 26 F 9 27 ...

Page 802: ...it 7 NOTE Use the cover included in the package of the Cassette Feeding Unit 8 F 9 28 F 9 29 9 NOTE Securely tighten the coin screws with a stubby screwdriver or a coin CAUTION When tightening the coin screws pay attention to plates and parts around the screws When tightening a screw on the rear side be careful not to drop it Be sure to check that the coin screws have been tightened securely 1x 1x...

Page 803: ...ling the Toner Container For China and Korea 10 NOTE Install the Cassette 1 with the rails extended F 9 31 F 9 32 Installing the Toner Container For China and Korea NOTE In the following procedure pictures of a host machine with the Cassette Feeding Unit are used but the procedure is the same 1 NOTE Repeat steps 2 to 4 for each color 2 F 9 33 F 9 34 ...

Page 804: ...the Toner Container black as shown in the figure and shake it approx 10 times CAUTION Be sure to shake the Toner Container with its Toner Outlet white part up or toner may not be properly supplied 9 10 F 9 35 4 Insert the Toner Container black until it stops NOTE Be sure to insert the Toner Container horizontally with your hand supporting its bottom until approx half of it is inserted 5 F 9 36 F 9...

Page 805: ...es other than China and Korea NOTE In the following procedure pictures of a host machine with the Cassette Feeding Unit are used but the procedure is the same 1 2 Repeat steps 3 to 5 for each color 3 Unpack the Toner Container F 9 38 4 Hold the Toner Container as shown in the figure on the left and shake it up and down approx 10 times CAUTION Be sure to shake the Toner Container with its Toner Out...

Page 806: ...r Container with the insertion opening and insert it horizontally until it stops NOTE Be sure to insert the Toner Container horizontally with your hand supporting its bottom until approx half of it is inserted 6 F 9 40 F 9 41 Installing the Scanner 1 NOTE Be sure to keep the Scanner System Fixation Screws in a safe place for moving the machine 2x F 9 42 ...

Page 807: ...te 1 NOTE Holding the Guide Plate Lever adjust each Guide Plate to the specified size Adjust the position of each Guide Plate according to the paper size Side Guide Plate Lever Side Guide Plate Trail Edge Guide Plate Trail Edge Guide Plate Lever 2 F 9 43 F 9 44 3 NOTE Affix the Size Label to each cassette according to the size of paper being set F 9 45 ...

Page 808: ...the Dehumidification Switch Excluding USA and Europe 1 Turn ON the Dehumidification Switch CAUTION If the installation environment is a high humidity environment be sure to turn ON the Dehumidification Switch F 9 46 Turning ON the Power 1 Connect the power plug to the outlet 2 Remove the Protection Sheet on the Control Panel 3 4 F 9 47 F 9 48 ...

Page 809: ...en configuring settings using Setup Guide excluding some of the setting items it is possible to proceed to the next setting without entering the current setting To configure skipped settings configure the settings one by one after exiting Setup Guide If the host machine is turned OFF during registration using Setup Guide Setup Guide is automatically started by turning ON the power again Once regis...

Page 810: ... detailed settings screen If the type of loaded paper is not displayed on the detailed settings screen you can register it 3 Authentication Login NOTE Pressing Skip proceeds to auto gradation adjustment instead of the setting of system administrator privilege Press Log in and enter a password CAUTION Do not change Administrator here Enter the initial value 7654321 in the password entry field 4 Use...

Page 811: ... the machine is automatically restarted 14 Check the following values from the Setting Value List which has been output in step 12 Output Report and write them down in the service label inside the Front Cover CONT Y CONT M CONT C CONT K D Y LVL D M LVL D C LVL D K LVL NOTE Values to be written down Check the values surrounded by the frame on the first sheet of the Setting Value List F 9 50 Informi...

Page 812: ...n the 2 cassette Pedestal is installed be sure to install the Right Cover Lower on the 2 casette Pedestal side In the case of not installing the 2 cassette Pedestal install it to the host machine 2 F 9 51 F 9 52 3 CAUTION When installing simultaneously with one of the following options install the Book Holder to the option Booklet Finisher Staple Finisher F 9 53 ...

Page 813: ... of the below image and instead install at the location instructed in the Installation Procedure of each option Inner Finisher Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher F 9 54 5 NOTE Clean the position where the Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box is to be installed with lint free paper moistened with alcohol Be sure to install the Glass Cleaning Sheet Storage Box to a position after checking with the user wh...

Page 814: ...tions 7 CAUTION If the machine comes with a Full Sensor remove the tape while paying attention not to damage the sensor 8 Install the Reverse Trailing Edge Guide CAUTION Do not install it if one of the following options is installed at the same time Inner 2way Tray Inner Finisher Staple Finisher Booklet Finisher F 9 57 F 9 58 ...

Page 815: ...for Latin America Hinge Caution Label Only for Latin America Copy Prohibition Label Cleaning Position Label Hinge Caution Label Finger Pinch Caution Label Only for Latin America Only for Latin America Only for Latin America Only for Latin America 11 Close the DADF F 9 59 Securing the Host Machine 1 NOTE Move the main body to the installation position and secure it in place by turning the 3 adjuste...

Page 816: ... CAUTION The Envelope Attachment is used exclusively with the Cassette 2 NOTE Install remove the Envelope Attachment only if requested by the customer Envelope Standards Type Short side X Long Side Y Monarch 3 7 8 x 7 1 2 inch 98 4 mm x 190 5 mm No 10 COM10 4 1 8 x 9 1 2 inch 104 7 mm x 241 3 mm DL 4 3 8 x 8 5 8 inch 110 mm x 220 mm T 9 3 When the Kit Is Not Used 1 2 Close the Cassette 2 F 9 61 ...

Page 817: ...pe size F 9 62 F 9 63 3 Load envelopes used by the user into the Cassette 2 4 Close the Cassette 2 Settings after Installation 1 Select Settings Registration Preferences Paper Settings Paper Settings Cassette 2 Envelope 2 Select the type of envelope to be used and then press OK to register it Display Operation Check 1 Check that Envelope is selected for Cassette 2 on the Control Panel s Paper Sett...

Page 818: ...AUTION To perform the network setting the following Additional Functions items must be set ON Additional Functions Configuration Network Confirm Network Connection Set Changes Additional Functions Configuration Network TCP IP Setting IPv4 setting Use IPv4 4 Turn OFF and then ON the main power Operation Procedure Using Ping 1 Select the following Additional Functions Configuration Network TCP IP se...

Page 819: ...play information of the IP address Checking the Network Setting of the Host Machine 1 Select the following Additional Functions Configuration Network TCP IP Setting IPv4 setting IP address setting and write down the address in the IP address field 2 Select the following Additional Functions Configuration Network TCP IP Setting IPv4 setting Ping Command and enter the IP address The IP address speci...

Page 820: ...Unit to the position where it is going to be secured Service Mode Level 2 COPIER Function MISC R RD SHPOS 2 Turn OFF the main power 3 Disconnect the power plug of the host machine 4 f the Cassette Pedestal is installed turn the 3 adjusters of the Cassette Pedestal with a screwdriver etc to lift them from the floor 5 Secure the Scanner Unit with the Scanner System Fixation Screws that have been kep...

Page 821: ... Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch of the host machine 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing F 9 67 F 9 68 Installation Procedure 1 Install the Copyboard Cover Unit 2 Remove the White Board F 9 69 F 9 70 ...

Page 822: ...e 3 Place the White Board on the Copyboard Glass by aligning it with the Index Sheet 4 Close the Copyboard Cover and then open it again F 9 71 F 9 72 5 Press the White Board upward as shown in the figure below CAUTION If the White Board is pressed downward it is placed on the Index Sheet so be sure to press it upward F 9 73 ...

Page 823: ...ced on the index of the Reader Unit perform steps 2 through 5 again CAUTION Be sure that there is no gap between the White Board and the Index Sheet As a guide it should be 0 3 mm or less Copyboard Cover Copyboard Cover Copyboard Cover Copyboard Cover White Board White Board White Board White Board Reader Unit Reader Unit Reader Unit Reader Unit Index Sheet Index Sheet Index Sheet Index Sheet 7 Co...

Page 824: ...ed portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 75 Checking the contents 1x 1x M3x6 1x F 9 76 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Chek that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off ...

Page 825: ...ation Inner 2way Tray J1 Installation procedure Installation procedure NOTE When installing the 3 Way Unit simultaneously skip step 1 1 CAUTION When the Full Detection Flag is attached remove the Reverse Guide while paying attention to the Full Detection Flag F 9 78 2 1x F 9 79 ...

Page 826: ... Installation Inner 2way Tray J1 Installation procedure Installation Inner 2way Tray J1 Installation procedure 3 F 9 80 4 CAUTION Be sure that the Inner 2 way Tray Support Member is installed properly F 9 82 F 9 81 ...

Page 827: ...tion Settings is set it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions of the user administrator Password at the time of shipment System Manager ID Administrator System PIN 7654321 1 Select Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings ON OFF of Use Optional Output Tray 2 Set the Delivery Tray 2 to ON and press OK 3 Turn OFF and then ON the main po...

Page 828: ... Way Unit Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Chek that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plug Installation Outline Drawing Checking the contents 1x F 9 84 F 9 85 Installation procedure 1 NOTE The work is the same when the Utility Tray is in...

Page 829: ...nstalled while laid flat be sure to install it while keeping it upright Rib Rib F 9 88 F 9 87 When the Utility Tray is installed 2 CAUTION Because the Copy Tray comes in contact with the rib if installed while laid flat be sure to install it while keeping it upright Rib Rib F 9 90 3 Connect the power plug to the outlet 4 Turn ON the main power switch of the host machine F 9 89 ...

Page 830: ...ser administrator Password at the time of shipment System Manager ID Administrator System PIN 7654321 1 Select Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings ON OFF of Use Optional Output Tray 2 Set the Delivery Tray 1 to ON and press OK 3 Turn OFF and then ON the main power 4 Select Settings Registration Function Settings Common Paper Output Settings Output Tray Settings 5 S...

Page 831: ...ity Tray Voice Operation Kit Voice Guidance Kit Serial Interface Kit Copy Control Interface Kit Copy Card Reader yes yes yes no no yes Available no Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 91 T 9 4 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1...

Page 832: ...al Relay Cable X 1 4 Card Reader Relay Unit X 1 5 Connector Cover X 1 10 Card Reader Mounting Plate lower Unit X 1 6 Cord Guide X 2 13 PCB Spacer X 1 12 Connector Cover X 1 8 Screw TP M3x6 X 5 9 Screw TP M3x12 X 2 14 Screw TP M4x12 X 2 15 Screw Binding M4x6 X 4 11 Screw W Sams M3x14 X 2 7 Wire Saddle X 1 F 9 94 Installation Procedure CAUTION After installing the Copy Card Reader enter the card num...

Page 833: ...py Card Reader F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit B4 Installation Procedure Installing the Copy Card Reader 2 1x F 9 96 Installing the Copy Card Reader 1 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it 1 Screw upper Remove 1 Screw lower to loosen CAUTION Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw upper will be used in step 4 F 9 97 ...

Page 834: ...ttachment Kit B4 Installation Procedure Installing the Copy Card Reader Installation Copy Card Reader F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit B4 Installation Procedure Installing the Copy Card Reader 2 1x NOTE The removed screw lower will be used in step 4 F 9 98 3 1x 1x ...

Page 835: ...nstallation Copy Card Reader F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit B4 Installation Procedure Installing the Copy Card Reader 4 NOTE Use the screws removed in steps 1 and 2 CAUTION Installation orientation of the Card Reader Relay Unit Be sure to install it in the orientation shown in the figure F 9 99 2x 1x F 9 100 5 1x 6 2x F 9 101 F 9 102 ...

Page 836: ...er Attachment Kit B4 Installation Procedure Installing the Copy Card Reader 7 NOTE Remove the Lower Cover of the Card Reader Unit and change the position of the cable 1x 1x Lower Cover Groove 8 1x F 9 103 F 9 104 9 Toothed Washer Wire Saddle Boss 1x 1x RS Tightening M4x10 Toothed Washer 10 CAUTION Be sure that the core is inside the Edge Saddle Core Edge Saddle 1x 1x F 9 105 F 9 106 ...

Page 837: ...Reader F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit B4 Installation Procedure Installing the Copy Card Reader 11 1x 12 TP M3x12 2x F 9 107 F 9 108 13 CAUTION Prevention of a fall Be sure to hold the Card Reader Mounting Plate Front Unit with your hand until securing it with screws NOTE Installing the Screws Install the screws in the order from 1 to 4 TP M3x6 4x F 9 109 ...

Page 838: ...eader F1 Copy Card Reader Attachment Kit B4 Installation Procedure Installing the Copy Card Reader 14 Connect the connector of the Card Reader External Relay Cable to the host machine and install the Connector Cover 1 Screw TP M3x6 CAUTION Installing the Connector Cover Be sure to insert the Harness Band inside the Connector Cover F 9 110 TP M3x6 1x 1x F 9 111 ...

Page 839: ...es and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure 17 Fold the Card Reader External Relay Cable at the A part and pass it through the Cord Guides and Wire Saddle 18 Install the 2 covers of the Cord Guides 19 Close the 1 Wire Saddle CAUTION Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord Guide Do not affix a Cord Guide on the Reader Cable Cover A 3x Reader Cable Cover Wire Saddle Exh...

Page 840: ...e Cable of the Voice Guidance 1 Remove the covers of the 4 Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure 2 Insert only the Speaker Cable through the 4 Cord Guides 3 Install the 4 Cord Guide Covers 2 Securing the Cable of the Copy Card Reader 1 Remove the covers of the 2 Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure Use the Cord Guides t...

Page 841: ...er the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord Guide Do not affix a Cord Guide on the Reader Cable Cover Exhaust Outlet 10x A Wire Saddle Reader Cable Cover F 9 115 Checking after Installation 1 Check the model of the Card Reader in service mode Check that the setting value is 0 in the following service mode Level 1 COPIER OPTION ACC CR TYPE 2 Set the number of card number of department ID that can be used w...

Page 842: ...e of Options Combination Voice Guidance Kit Voice Operation Kit Serial Interface Kit Copy Control Interface Ki Card Reader Utility Tray no no yes yes yes yes Available no Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 116 T 9 6 Checking the Contents 1x 10x 5x TP M4x8 4x 2x TP M4x14...

Page 843: ...2 Installation Procedure Installation Utility Tray A2 Installation Procedure Installation Procedure 1 Remove the all tapes from this equipment 2 2x F 9 119 3 CAUTION To avoid damage do not pull the A part of the Utility Tray too much A F 9 120 ...

Page 844: ...allation Procedure 4 F 9 121 5 CAUTION Points to Note at Installation Be sure to install it by using the holes with the marks C F I L and O CAUTION Be sure to install the Utility Tray Mounting Plate where it does not cover the USB Slot F 9 122 5x A Q R S B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P TP M4x8 F 9 123 ...

Page 845: ...tallation Utility Tray A2 When Installing the USB Keyboard Installation Utility Tray A2 When Installing the USB Keyboard 6 7 TP M4x8 2x 2x F 9 124 F 9 125 When Installing the USB Keyboard 1 Cap Cover Wire Saddle F 9 126 ...

Page 846: ...ng the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 127 Installation Outline Drawing F 9 128 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Chek that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnect the power plu...

Page 847: ...stallation Stamp Unit B1 IInstallation procedure IInstallation procedure 1 2 F 9 130 F 9 131 3 4 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the A part of the Feed Guide with a screwdriver when removing the screw 1x A NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 F 9 132 F 9 133 ...

Page 848: ... 5 CAUTION Be sure to push the Stamp Ink Cartridge in until it clicks Stamp Ink Cartridge Stamp Solenoid 6 1x P Tightening M3x12 1x F 9 134 F 9 135 7 NOTE Use the screws removed in step 4 CAUTION Be careful not to damage the A part of the Feed Guide with a screwdriver when tightening the screw 1x A 8 F 9 136 F 9 137 ...

Page 849: ...h 3 Press Finished Stamp key Scan and Send or Fax Other Function Finished Stamp 4 Put an original in the Feeder perform a send test and check that a stamp is printed on the original NOTE Send test method 1 Load paper to the Feeder 2 Enter 1 for the destination and then send from Scan and Send 3 The paper in the feeder is fed and stamped 4 Cancel the operation when the host machine enters the trans...

Page 850: ...rol Interface Kit Serial Interface Kit Card Reader Voice Operation Kit no no yes yes yes yes Available no Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 139 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sure that ...

Page 851: ...ard Unit X 1 5 Support Plate X 1 3 DVI Cable X 1 4 Ring Core X 2 6 Cable Face SealX 1 F 9 141 7 Cord Guide X 7 8 PCB Spacer X 1 9 Screw Bind M4x14 X 2 10 Screw TP M3x6 X 2 11 Screw Bind M3x14 X 1 12 Ring Core X 1 13 Wire Saddle X 3 14 Screw Bind M4x20 X 2 Use 1 of them Use 1 of them 12 Use the Ring Core for the External Switch Cable which belongs to the user Others Including guides F 9 142 ...

Page 852: ...stallation Procedure Installation Voice Operation Kit C2 Installation Procedure Installation Procedure 1 2x 2 1x F 9 143 F 9 144 3 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it as shown in the figure 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 F 9 145 ...

Page 853: ...tallation Voice Operation Kit C2 Installation Procedure 4 2x 5 Install the PCB Spacer F 9 146 F 9 147 6 Remove the spacers and screws from the Voice Operation Board Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 7 2 spacers The removed spacers will not be used 2x F 9 148 ...

Page 854: ...stall the Voice Operation Board Unit while holding it as shown in the figure 1 Connector 3 Screws Use the 1 screw removed in step 3 and the 2 screws removed in step 6 1 Screw TP M3x6 CAUTION Check that the connector is connected properly NOTE Install the screws in the order from 1 to 4 TP M3x6 2x 2x 1x F 9 149 8 1x 9 2x F 9 150 F 9 151 ...

Page 855: ...t Cover The removed Face Seals will not be used F 9 152 F 9 153 12 Remove the Speaker Unit Lower from the Speaker Unit 2 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 14 2x 13 Install the Speaker Unit Lower 1 Screw Binding M3x14 1 Screw Binding M4x14 NOTE Installing the screws Install the screws in the order from 1 to 2 2x Bind M3x14 Bind M4x14 Bind M4x14 Bind M3x14 F 9 154 F 9 155 ...

Page 856: ...crews Use the screws removed in step 12 NOTE Install the Speaker Unit Upper while pressing it from the direction of the arrow 2x F 9 156 15 Install the Ring Cores to both ends of the DVI Cable and remove the cap Cap DVI Cable Ring Cores approx 50 mm 16 Connect both ends of the DVI Cable and tighten the Fixation Screws 2 Fixation Screws each 1x 2x 1x 2x F 9 157 F 9 158 ...

Page 857: ...d Guides and install the 7 covers of the Cord Guides CAUTION Do not cover the Exhaust Outlet with the Cord Guide Do not affix a Cord Guide on the Reader Cable Cover 7x Reader Cable Cover Exhaust Outlet F 9 159 19 Putting the user s External Switch Cable around the Ring Core CAUTION Be sure to install the Ring Core as close to where the cable is connected as possible 20 Insert the user s External S...

Page 858: ...g after Installation NOTE When changing the settings upon user s request it is required to log in as a system manager in accordance with instructions from the user administrator 1 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Use Voice Navigation and check that the setting ...

Page 859: ...ls of removal procedure refer to the Service Manual The USB Device Port must be installed beforehand to install the Card Reader sales company s option CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 163 Check Item when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power switch is OFF 1 Turn OF...

Page 860: ... Unit X 1 3 DP Board X 1 4 DP Sheet for Japan X 1 5 DP Sheet for Europe X 1 6 DP Fireproof Sheet X 1 7 Cusion X 2 8 DP USB Cable X 1 9 Screw TP Round End M3 6 X 10 10 Screw Binding M4 6 X 10 11 Screw RS Tightening Round End M3 8 5 X 1 12 Wire Saddle X 1 Use 4 of them F 9 165 13 Wire Saddle X 1 14 Edge Saddle X 1 G 1 DP Mounting Plate X 1 2 DP Support Plate X 1 3 DP Support Plate Cover X 1 4 DP Cab...

Page 861: ... X 1 3 DP Mounting Reinforcing Plate H X 1 C 1 DP Mounting Plate P X 1 2 Paper Feed Sheet P X 1 3 USB Cable X 1 F 9 169 F 9 170 F 9 171 D 1 DP Mounting Plate W X 1 2 Paper Feed Sheet W X 1 3 DP Shield Plate X 2 E 1 DP Mounting Plate B X 1 2 DP Support Plate B X 1 3 DP Cable Guide Unit X 1 F 1 DP Base Cover C X 1 2 DP Mounting Plate C X 1 3 DP Reinforcing Plate C X 1 F 9 172 F 9 173 F 9 174 ...

Page 862: ...Control Panel in the direction of the arrow and open the DADF or the Copyboard Cover 2 Open the Right Door F 9 175 F 9 176 3 Remove the Reader Front Cover 2 Screws 2 Protrusions 2x Protrusions 4 Remove the Reader Front Sub Cover Removed Reader Front Sub Cover will not be used 1 Screw Removed screw will not be used 1 Claw 2 Bosses 1x Claw Boss F 9 177 F 9 178 ...

Page 863: ...he bosses in the DP Base Cover with the corresponding holes for the hooks and long holes for the bosses in the DP Base and push the DP base in to the DP Base Cover Installation becomes difficult if the bosses and their positioning holes are aligned first Hook A Hook Boss Hook Hook A F 9 179 6 Install the DP Mounting Plate to the DP Lower Cover Unit 2 Bosses 4 Screws Binding M4x6 4x Boss Boss Bindi...

Page 864: ...ocedure Installation USB Device Port E4 Installation Procedure 7 Install the DP Support Plate Cover to the DP Support Plate 4 Claws F 9 181 8 Install the DP Support Plate Unit to the DP Lower Cover Unit 2 Bosses 2 Screws Binding M4x6 2x Boss Binding M4x6 F 9 182 ...

Page 865: ...s 1 Boss Boss Claw Claw 10 Install the DP PCB 3 Screws TP M3x6 3x TP Round End M3x6 F 9 183 F 9 184 11 Install the DP Lower Cover Unit 1 Hook 2 Bosses 1 Screw A RS Tightening Round End M3x8 5 4 Screws Binding M4x6 NOTE Use a stubby screwdriver to tighten the screw A 1x 4x A Binding M4 6 RS Tightening Round End M3 8 5 Hook hole Screw hole Boss Screw hole F 9 185 ...

Page 866: ... USB Cable 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 20 1 Hook 1x Hook 1x 13 Pull out the Power Supply Cable of the Control Panel F 9 186 F 9 187 14 Install the DP Harness Guide Unit in the direction of the arrow 1 Protrusion 1 Hook 1 Claw Hook Claw Protruson 15 Connect the 2 connectors 1 Reuse Band 1x 2x Reuse Band Connector Connector F 9 188 F 9 189 ...

Page 867: ...ing Plate will be used in step 19 2 Screws Removed screws will be used in step 19 2x F 9 190 F 9 191 18 Route the USB Cable which was disconnected in step 12 as shown in the figure and connect it to the DP Board 1 Screw TP M3x6 Harness Guide 1x 1x TP Round End M3 6 1x 19 Connect the DP USB Cable which is included in the package to the USB Mounting Plate removed in step 17 2 Bosses 2 Screws Use the...

Page 868: ... Connect the DP USB Cable mentioned in step 19 by routing it along the Harness Guide 1 Hook 1 Screw Use the screw removed in step 12 1x 1x Hook 1x F 9 194 NOTE Route the USB Cable along the groove of the guide A A USB Cable F 9 195 21 Remove the Transparent Cover using a flat blade screwdriver 1 Claw 2 Hooks Hook Claw F 9 196 ...

Page 869: ...he arrow 1 Protrusion 2 Hooks 2 Claws Hook Claw F 9 197 23 Install the Card Reader and store the cable as shown in the figure NOTE Store the cable in place so that the Transparent Cover is securely fitted in step 28 1x 24 Remove the release sheet of the DP Fireproof Sheet and affix the sheet by aligning it the 3 ribs and pushing it against the Rib A Rib A Rib F 9 198 F 9 199 ...

Page 870: ...r 2 according to how the cable of the Card Reader is stored F 9 200 26 Place the Card Reader and install the DP Sheet for Europe and the Transparent Cover 2 Hooks 1 Claw NOTE Insert the DP Sheet for Europe to the A area with the illustration side facing up and by inserting bending the bent bar code area B and the claw Be sure that the Transparent Cover is installed properly B A Hook DP Sheet Claw ...

Page 871: ...ransparent Cover Protection Sheet 28 Return the Reader Front Cover to its original position 2 Protrusion 2 Screws 2x Protrusions F 9 202 F 9 203 29 Close the Right Door 30 Return the Control Panel to its original position and close the DADF or the Copyboard cover 31 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet 32 Turn ON the main power switch F 9 204 ...

Page 872: ...lay Settings Store Location Display Settings When it is set to OFF set it to ON and execute Settings Registration Apply Set Chng according to the display 2 Set Settings Registration Function Settings Store Access Files Memory Media Settings Use Scan Print Functions to ON 3 Execute Settings Registration Apply Set Chng according to the display 4 Mount the Memory Media to the Multimedia Card Reader W...

Page 873: ... E4 Operation Check Reading Check 7 After scanning of the original is completed press Start Storing Confirm that data is stored in the media and press Main Menu on the Control Panel F 9 208 Reading Check 1 Make the following selection from Main Menu Access Stored Files Memory Media Memory Media A F 9 209 ...

Page 874: ... E4 Operation Check Reading Check 2 Select the files stored in step 4 step 5 step 6 of Writing Check and then press the Print button F 9 210 3 Press the Start Printing button and print the file Then check that the file is printed correctly 4 Press the Main Menu button on the Control Panel F 9 211 F 9 212 ...

Page 875: ...Port E4 Operation Check Memory Media Removal Memory Media Removal 1 Press the Mount Mark in the bottom right Then select the memory media to be removed and press the Remove button F 9 213 2 Press the OK button Then check that the Mount Mark is not indicated in the bottom right on the Main Menu screen F 9 214 ...

Page 876: ...When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 215 Refer to Table of Options Combination when installing this equipment before operation Table of Options Combination Utility Tray Voice Operation Kit Serial Interface Kit Copy Control Interface Kit Copy Card Reader Voice Guidance Kit no no yes yes yes yes Available no...

Page 877: ...e Kit F2 1 Speaker Unit Upper X 1 2 Speaker Unit Lower X 1 3 Voice Guidance Board Unit X 1 11 Voice Guidance Board Support Plate X 1 4 Speaker Cable X 1 5 Cord Guide X 7 6 Ring Core X 2 12 Cable Face Seal X 1 13 Card Spacer X 1 10 Screw Binding M4x16 X 2 Use 1 of them 14 Screw Binding M4x20 X 2 7 Screw Binding M3x16 X 1 8 Screw Binding M4x6 X 1 9 Screw TP M3x6 X 4 Use 1 of them Use 4 of them Other...

Page 878: ...0 series Installation Procedure Installation Voice Guidance Kit F2 Voice Guidance Connection Kit for iR ADV C3300 series Installation Procedure Installation Procedure 1 2x 2 1x F 9 219 F 9 220 3 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it 1x NOTE The removed screw will be used in step 7 F 9 221 ...

Page 879: ...00 series Installation Procedure 4 2x F 9 222 5 Remove the 4 screws and replace the Voice Guidance Board Voice Guidance Board for iR ADV C3300 series with Voice Guidance Board 3 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 6 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 7 1 Spacer The removed spacer will not be used 6 Install the 3 screws removed in the previous step 4x 3x Voice Guidance Board ...

Page 880: ...onnection Kit for iR ADV C3300 series Installation Procedure CAUTION After replacement check that you have installed FM1 B870 F 9 224 CAUTION Place the Support late under the Voice Guidance Board F 9 225 7 NOTE Use the screws removed in step 5 and step 3 Install the screws in the order from 1 to 3 CAUTION Check that the connector is connected properly TP M3x6 1x 1x 2x F 9 226 ...

Page 881: ...it F2 Voice Guidance Connection Kit for iR ADV C3300 series Installation Procedure Installation Voice Guidance Kit F2 Voice Guidance Connection Kit for iR ADV C3300 series Installation Procedure 8 1x 9 2x F 9 227 F 9 228 10 2x 11 F 9 229 F 9 230 ...

Page 882: ...e Guidance Connection Kit for iR ADV C3300 series Installation Procedure 12 NOTE Installing the screws Install the screws in the order from 1 to 2 Binding M4x16 Binding M3x16 Binding M3x16 Binding M4x16 2x F 9 231 13 NOTE Installing the screws Install the Speaker Unit Upper while pressing it from the direction of the arrow Binding M4x6 1x 14 約 50 mm F 9 232 F 9 233 ...

Page 883: ...ard Reader F1 and Voice Guidance F2 1 Securing the Cable of the Voice Guidance 1 Remove the covers of the 4 Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the position as shown in the figure 2 Insert only the Speaker Cable through the 4 Cord Guides 3 tall the 4 Cord Guide Covers 2 Securing the Cable of the Copy Card Reader 1 Remove the covers of the 2 Cord Guides and affix the Cord Guides to the positio...

Page 884: ...r 1 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Use Voice Navigation and check that the setting is ON 4 Select Settings Registration Preferences Accessibility Voice Navigation Settings Voice Guide from Speakers and check that the setting is ON 5 Turn OFF ON the main power...

Page 885: ...Image Data Analyzer Board because installing the license before installing the Image Data Analyzer Board causes an error CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 237 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Check that...

Page 886: ...ck Kit B1 Installation Procedure Installation Document Scan Lock Kit B1 Installation Procedure Installation Procedure 1 2x 2 1x F 9 240 F 9 241 3 CAUTION Be careful not to drop the screws 4x NOTE The removed screws will be used in step 7 F 9 242 ...

Page 887: ...nstallation Procedure 4 NOTE Be sure to connect the PCB spacers to improve work efficiency 3x F 9 243 5 NOTE Be sure to install the PCB Spacers in the order of 1 to 4 4x 3x NOTE How to Remove the PCB Spacers Be sure to hold the PCB Spacer and remove the second and the subsequent ones as shown below 1x F 9 245 F 9 244 ...

Page 888: ... Installation Document Scan Lock Kit B1 Installation Procedure Installation Document Scan Lock Kit B1 Installation Procedure 6 4x 7 NOTE Use the screws removed in step 3 1x 4x F 9 246 F 9 247 8 1x 9 2x F 9 248 F 9 249 ...

Page 889: ...tallation Checking after Installation 1 Connect the power plug of the host machine to the power outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Ask users to install license 4 Turn OFF ON the main power switch 5 Press Counter Check key on the control panel 6 Press Chk Device Config 7 Check that Image Data Analyzer Board is displayed in option field ...

Page 890: ...e of Options Combination Utility Tray Voice Operation Kit Voice Operation Kit Serial Interface Kit Copy Control Interface Kit Copy Card Reader Serial Interface Kit yes yes yes no no Copy Control Interface Kit yes yes yes no no yes Available no Unavailable CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw h...

Page 891: ... Installation Serial Intreface KIT K2 Copy Control Interface KIT A1 Remove the covers Checking the Contents Serial Intreface KIT K2 1x 1x 1x 1x 1x 2x 1x 2x 3x M3x6 Others Including guides Copy Control Interface KIT A1 1x 1x 2x 2x 2x 2x 1x F 9 252 F 9 253 Remove the covers 1 ws 2x 2 1x F 9 254 F 9 255 ...

Page 892: ...1 Installation Procedure Installing the Serial Interface Kit Installation Procedure Installing the Serial Interface Kit 1 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it 1 Screw upper Remove 1 Screw lower to loosen CAUTION Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 1x 1x NOTE The removed screw upper will be used in step 4 F 9 256 2 1x NOTE The removed screw lower will be used in step 4 3 3x 1x M3x6 F 9 257...

Page 893: ...ce KIT A1 Installation Procedure Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit 4 NOTE Connect the connector to J14 11 pin and install the Serial RS Conversion Board Use the screws removed in steps 1 and 2 4x 1x F 9 259 Installing the Copy Control Interface Kit 1 NOTE Remove the Face Plate while holding it 1 Screw upper Remove 1 Screw lower to loosen CAUTION Be careful not to drop the Face Plate 1x 1x ...

Page 894: ...ol Interface KIT A1 Installing the Covers 2 CAUTION Install the extruded side of the D SUB Support Plate as shown in the figure Inside D SUB Support Plate CC VI Cable 3 CAUTION Install the CC VI Cable in the direction shown in the figure F 9 261 F 9 262 4 2x 1x Washer large Spring Washer small Hexagonal Screw Installing the Covers 1 1x F 9 263 F 9 264 ...

Page 895: ... Intreface KIT K2 Copy Control Interface KIT A1 Installing the Covers Installation Serial Intreface KIT K2 Copy Control Interface KIT A1 Installing the Covers 2 2x 3 Connect the power plug to the outlet 4 Turn ON the power switch F 9 265 ...

Page 896: ...ement Settings No Adjustment Maintenance No Function Settings Except for Printer Custom Settings Forwarding Settings No Set Destination Except for Address List No Management Settings Except for Address List No User authentication information used for local device authentication of UA User Authentication Management Settings User Management Authentication Management User Management etc Yes Printer S...

Page 897: ...gement Printer Settings Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management Import or Export Set Paper Information Setting items for each menu in Main Menu Copy Scan and Send Fax Scan and Store Access Stored Files Fax I Fax Inbox Favorite Settings Remote UI Settings Registration Management Settings Data Management Import or Export All Setting items for Quick Menu T 9 11 Backup targ...

Page 898: ...n importing exporting from service mode Perform backup of service mode setting values in the USB flash drive Perform backup from BACK UP in service mode For the procedure refer to the following section of the Service Manual ServiceManual Technology DCM DCM Import Export by Service Mode External Refer to p 2 163 Procedure for Import Export ALL of User Settings Following data can be batch exported S...

Page 899: ...EAP Application Management page and click on the appropriate application names 9 Click License Management on the Application License Information page 10 Click Download 11 Following the instructions on the window specify the location to save the file Set a distinctive name for the disabled license file so that you can recognize it for which application After you download the disabled license file t...

Page 900: ...nual A host address can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes using the Kana Kanji Katakana alphanumeric character mark and code input modes A path to the folder can be up to 255 characters in 1 byte 127 characters in 2 bytes A user name can be up to 128 characters in 1 byte or 64 characters in 2 bytes using the Kana Kanji Katakana alphanumeric character mark and code input...

Page 901: ...ening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 266 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Kit CAUTION A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker is not torn If the package appears to ...

Page 902: ...nstalling the HDD Encryption Board to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board When this error occurs the machine needs to be returned again to the initial state in which no Encryption Board is installed 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER Function INSTALL HD CRYP Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn O...

Page 903: ... Kit C9 3 2x Installing the HDD Data Encryption Kit C9 1 Remove the HDD Frame by sliding it 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 11 3 Hooks 1x 2x 1x F 9 271 F 9 272 2 Open the Wire Saddle and disconnect Power Cable and Signal Cable The removed Power Cable and Signal Cable will be used in step 3 2 Connectors 1x 2x 3 Connect Power Cable and Signal Cable disconnec...

Page 904: ... 250 mm A HDD Sig included in the package with the Cable Guid CAUTION 1 Installing the cables Be sure to install it in the orientation shown in the figure CAUTION 2 Position to install the Power Cable 270 mm A HDD Pow1 and the Signal Cable 250 mm A HDD Sig Be sure to install each Cable in the position shown in the figure approx 40 mm approx 30 mm F 9 275 F 9 276 1x 5 Pass the Power Cable 270 mm A ...

Page 905: ...lling the HDD Data Encryption Kit C9 6 Turn over the HDD Frame and attach the Cable Guide to the HDD Frame 4 Hooks 1 Boss CAUTION Be sure that the boss is fitted properly F 9 279 7 Install the Encryption Board 4 Screws TP M3x6 CAUTION Installing the screws Install the screws in the order from 1 to 4 TP M3x6 4x 8 Connect the Power Cable 270 mm A HDD Pow1 and Signal Cable 250 mm A HDD Sig to the Enc...

Page 906: ...Procedure Installing the HDD Data Encryption Kit C9 9 Pass the other ends of the Power Cable and Signal Cable through the hole in the HDD Frame and pull them out as shown in the figure 10 Secure the Power Cable and Signal Cable in place using the Wire Saddle 1x F 9 282 F 9 283 11 Install the HDD Frame to the host machine by sliding it 3 Hooks 1 Screw Use the screw removed in steps 1 2 Connectors 1...

Page 907: ...yption Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Installing the Covers Installation TYPE 1 HDD Data Encryption Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Installing the Covers Installing the Covers 1 1x 2 2x F 9 285 F 9 286 3 2x F 9 287 ...

Page 908: ... connect the user s network cable to the machine In case of USB flash drive 1 Connect the USB memory to the PC 2 Start up SST and click the USB icon displayed in the target selection screen 3 Select the drive the model series and the version to be written to the USB flash drive and click Confirm 4 Click Start and after the version has been written to the USB flash drive click OK and then remove th...

Page 909: ...ctions are enabled This will enable the system administrator to quickly detect when the functions become disabled and request a service call to correct the error Checking That Installation Is Complete Following the section Checking the Security Version display the version information of the security chip from Check Device Configuration on the Control Panel and show the system administrator that 2 ...

Page 910: ...ding created with SST CAUTION Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 288 Check Items when Turning OFF the Main Power Check that the main power is OFF 1 Turn OFF the main power switch 2 Be sure that display in the Control Panel and the lamp of the main power supply are turned off then disconnec...

Page 911: ...t Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Removing the Covers Installation TYPE 2 Removable HDD Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Removing the Covers Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 1 2x 2 1x F 9 291 F 9 292 3 2x F 9 293 ...

Page 912: ...t Installing the Removable HDD Kit 1 Remove the packing tape and disassemble the HDD Slot Unit HDD Slot HDD Case 2 Remove the HDD Frame by sliding it 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 12 3 Hooks 1x 2x 1x F 9 294 3 Remove the HDD and 2 Cables from the HDD Frame 4 Screws They will be used in step 7 1 Wire Saddle CAUTION Be sure to hold the HDD so as not to dro...

Page 913: ...tion TYPE 2 Removable HDD Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Installing the Removable HDD Kit 4 Remove the 4 Anti vibration Dampers and then Install these Dampers to the HDD Case 5 Disconnect 2 Cables from the HDD The 2 removed cables will not be used 2x F 9 297 F 9 298 6 Connect the Conversion Connector to the HDD 1x F 9 299 ...

Page 914: ... up and the connector oriented as shown in the figure F 9 300 4x F 9 301 8 Affix the HDD Warning Label in the appropriate language aligning the label with the Rib CAUTION Be sure to affix the HDD Warning Label in the direction as shown in the figure 9 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the R HDD Label and affix it to the space on the top of the HDD CAUTION Be sure to write down th...

Page 915: ...ng the Removable HDD Kit 10 Install the HDD Slot to the HDD Frame 8 Bosses 4 Hooks CAUTION Set the HDD Toggle Lever in the correct position as shown in the figure and check that the HDD Case can be inserted all the way and installed properly Unless the HDD Toggle Lever is in the correct position the HDD Case cannot be installed F 9 303 CAUTION Be sure not to trap the Power Cable and Signal Cable d...

Page 916: ...DD Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Installing the Removable HDD Kit 11 Secure the Power Cable and Signal Cable in place using the Wire Saddle 1x F 9 305 12 Install the HDD Frame by sliding it 3 Hooks 1 Screw Use the screw removed in step 2 1 Edge Saddle CAUTION Be sure not to trap the Power Cable and Signal Cable during installation 1x 1x F 9 306 ...

Page 917: ...HDD Kit 13 Connect the Signal Cable and the Power Cable to the Main Controller PCB 2 Connectors 2x 14 Install the 2 Wire Saddles to the Controller Box Frame 15 Secure the Signal Cable and Power Cable in place using the 2Wire Saddles NOTE Fold the Power Cable at the A part and then secure it using the Wire Saddles NOTE Secure the Power Cable in place using the 2 Wire Saddles Secure the Signal Cable...

Page 918: ...D Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Installing the Covers Installation TYPE 2 Removable HDD Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Installing the Covers Installing the Covers 1 1x 2 2x F 9 308 F 9 309 3 4 2x F 9 310 F 9 311 ...

Page 919: ...the Removable HDD 1 Install the HDD Unit to the HDD Slot 2 Be sure to request the user to padlock the removable HDD to discourage theft Checking after Installation 1 Connect the power plug to the outlet 2 Turn ON the main power switch 3 Check that the HDD is recognized Select service mode level 1 COPIER Display ACC STS HDD and check that the manufacturer s name and the model number are displayed F...

Page 920: ...N Marked portion When tightening the screws do not tighten them too tightly Otherwise there is a risk of damage and deformation of screw holes F 9 313 Points to Note when Unpacking HDD Data Encryption Mirroring Kit CAUTION A security sticker is attached to the kit package to indicate that the package has not been opened Check to see that the package has not been opened in any way and the sticker i...

Page 921: ...uting this service mode setting Turning OFF the main power without executing service mode causes E602 5001 mistake in the procedure before installing the HDD Encryption Board to occur when turning ON the main power after installing the Encryption Board If this error occurs the HDD needs to be returned to the non encrypted state 1 Execute the following service mode level 1 COPIER Function INSTALL H...

Page 922: ...t Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Removing the Covers Installation TYPE 3 HDD Data Encryption Kit Removable HDD Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Removing the Covers Installation Procedure Removing the Covers 1 2x 2 1x F 9 317 F 9 318 3 2x F 9 319 ...

Page 923: ...allation Procedure Installing the Removable H Installing the Removable HDD Kit HDD Data Encryption Kit 1 Remove the HDD Frame by sliding it 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle 1 Screw The removed screw will be used in step 20 3 Hooks 1x 2x 1x F 9 320 2 Remove the HDD from the HDD Frame 4 Screws The removed screws will be used in step 7 1 Wire Saddle CAUTION Be sure to hold the HDD so as not to drop it when...

Page 924: ...Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Installing the Removable H 3 Remove the Power Cable and Signal Cable from the HDD and install the Encryption Board 2 Connector 2x 2x 4 Remove the packing tape and disassemble the HDD Slot Unit HDD Slot HDD Case F 9 323 F 9 324 5 Connect the Coversion Connector to the HDD 1x 6 Remove the 4 Anti vibration Dampers and install them to the HDD Case F 9 ...

Page 925: ...the label side facing up and the connector oriented as shown in the figure F 9 327 4x F 9 328 8 Affix the HDD Warning Label in the appropriate language aligning the label with the Rib CAUTION Be sure to affix the HDD Warning Label in the direction as shown in the figure 9 Write down the serial number of the host machine to the R HDD Label and affix it to the space on the top of the HDD CAUTION Be ...

Page 926: ...nstalling the Removable H 10 Remove the Relay Connector The removed Relay Connector will not be used 1 Connector 1x F 9 329 11 Pass the Power Cable and Signal Cable through the hole in the HDD Frame CAUTION Set the HDD Toggle Lever in the correct position as shown in the figure and check that the HDD Case can be inserted all the way and installed properly Unless the HDD Toggle Lever is in the corr...

Page 927: ...H Installation TYPE 3 HDD Data Encryption Kit Removable HDD Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Installing the Removable H 12 Install the HDD Slot to the HDD Frame 8 Bosses 4 Hooks CAUTION Be sure not to trap the Power Cable and Signal Cable during installation F 9 332 13 Install the Cable Guide to the HDD Frame 4 Hooks 1 Boss F 9 333 ...

Page 928: ... Guide CAUTION Position to install the Cable Be sure to connect the Power Cable in a way such that its extra length is approx 40 mm approx 40 mm F 9 334 CAUTION Be sure to route the Power Cable along the bottom of the concave of the Cable Guide 1x 15 Secure the Signal Cable connected to the HDD Slot with the Cable Guide CAUTION Position to install the Cable Be sure to connect the Signal Cable in a...

Page 929: ...ure Installation Procedure Installing the Removable H 16 Install the Encryption Board 4 Screws TP M3x6 CAUTION Install the screws in the order from 1 to 4 4x TP M3x6 17 Connect the Power Cable and Signal Cable to the Encryption Board 2 Connectors 2x F 9 337 F 9 338 18 Pass the Power Cable and Signal Cable through the hole in the HDD Frame 19 Secure the Power Cable and Signal Cable in place using t...

Page 930: ... Frame to the host machine by sliding it 3 Hooks 1 Screw Use the screw removed in step 1 2 Connectors 1 Edge Saddle CAUTION Install the HDD Frame Be sure to install the HDD Frame by holding the cable and pushing the HDD Frame Do not damage the cable with the edge etc during installation Be careful not to drop the screws 1x 2x 1x F 9 341 21 Install the Wire Saddle to the Controller Box Frame 22 Sec...

Page 931: ... Kit Removable HDD Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Installing the Covers Installation TYPE 3 HDD Data Encryption Kit Removable HDD Kit Installation Procedure Installation Procedure Installing the Covers 2 2x 3 F 9 344 F 9 345 4 2x F 9 346 ...

Page 932: ...power OFF 2 Connect the PC and the machine using an Cross Ethernet cable In case of SST 3 Turn ON the power of the PC 3 Registering the system software 1 Insert the latest System Software into the PC using the SST 2 Start the SST 3 Click Register Firmware 4 Select the drive where the system software has been inserted and click the SEARCH button 5 Click the REGISTER button 6 Click OK 4 Initializing...

Page 933: ...ip item indicating the version of the security chip to confirm that an Encryption Board that contains a security chip version that has received CC certification is operating correctly Checking the Security Mark The user can check the security mark displayed on the Control Panel when using the host machine to confirm that security is being protected This security mark is displayed only when an Encr...

Page 934: ...n work Executing auto gradation adjustment When this product is installed the machine initializes its HDD resetting the data used for auto gradation correction Therefore execute full adjustment of auto gradation adjustment after installing this kit to enable proper images to be output Execution of the minimum installation work Be sure to execute the minimum installation work in accordance with the...

Page 935: ... Service Tools General Circuit Diagram Backup Data Detail of HDD partition Soft counter specifications Removal Appendix ...

Page 936: ...ol No Ctgr Appearance Remarks Digital multimeter FY9 2002 A Used as a probe extension when making electrical checks Tester extension pin FY9 3038 A Tester extension pin L shaped FY9 3039 A Use for electrical checks CA 7 test Sheet FY9 9323 A Used for adjusting checking images Reference Category A Must be kept by each service engineer B Must be kept by each group of about five engineers C Must be k...

Page 937: ...III III Appendix Service Tools Special Tools Appendix Service Tools Special Tools Solvents and Oils None ...

Page 938: ...34 SOLD33 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J204 J1121 J801 1 2 3 4 5 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J201 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J202 1 2 3 4 5 J26 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 J19 MT1 MT2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 J18 PIN1 J401 PIN2 J502 J501 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 2 3 4 5 6 1 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 ...

Page 939: ...items for Quick Menu Button Size information HDD Clear Clear Clear Wallpaper Setting HDD Clear Clear Clear Button information in Quick Menu HDD Clear Clear Clear Restrict Quick Menu HDD Clear Clear Clear Setting items for Main Men Button settings in Main Menu HDD Clear Clear Clear Button settings on the top of the screen HDD Clear Clear Clear Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu HDD Clear Clear Clear O...

Page 940: ...PC USB Shortcut settings for Options HDD No No No No Yes 6 Download Mode Meapback PC USB Previous Settings HDD No No No No Yes 6 Download Mode Meapback PC USB Setting items for Quick Menu Button Size information HDD Yes RUI Quick Menu Export PC No No Yes 25 Yes 6 Download Mode Meapback PC USB Wallpaper Setting HDD Yes RUI Quick Menu Export PC No No Yes 25 Yes 6 Download Mode Meapback PC USB Button...

Page 941: ...ings Except for Department ID Management HDD Yes RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes Yes Turn OFF the main power switch FLASH UA User Authentication information HDD Yes RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes 22 No Printer Settings HDD No No Yes Turn OFF the main power switch FLASH Set Paper Information HDD Yes RUI LUI WebService PC USB Yes No Setting items for each menu in Main Menu Copy Scan and Send Fax Scan a...

Page 942: ...matically recovered from the key in the FLASH PCB 12 When replacing the HDD and FLASH PCB simultaneously the key information is not restored automatically 13 An error code is displayed when ON is displayed for the TPM setting After all data settings are initialized after restart select ON for the TPM setting to enable the TPM setting 14 If the TPM key information in the FLASH is lost the key infor...

Page 943: ...t can be expanded FSTCDEV 5 Image data storage area for Job archive system 1 1 1 1 IMGMNG 6 Management data of image 1 1 1 1 TMP_GEN 7 Storage area of universal data temporary file 1 1 1 APL_GEN 8 Storage area of universal data Note For details see the following list 1 1 TMP_PSS 9 PDL spool related area 1 1 1 APL_SEND 10 Address book Setting for Forwarding 1 1 UPDATE 11 Update related area 1 1 1 A...

Page 944: ...ettings in Main Menu Button settings on the top of the screen Wallpaper Setting for Main Menu Other settings for Main Menu Setting for Advance Box Registration information of Network Place Setting for Web Access Web Access Setting information Setting for Universal Data Unsent document which is set timer transmission or reservation transmission Job log information Key and server certificate which a...

Page 945: ... bottle yellow 093 1 10 Toner bottle magenta 094 1 10 Toner bottle cyan 101 Total 1 102 Total 2 103 Total large 104 Total small 105 Total full color 1 106 Total full color 2 108 Total black and white 1 109 Total black and white 2 110 Total mono color large 111 Total mono color small 112 Total black and white large 113 Total black and white small 114 Total 1 double sided 115 Total 2 double sided 11...

Page 946: ...otal 1 202 Copy Total 2 203 Copy large 204 Copy small 205 Copy A Total 1 206 Copy A Total 2 No Counter Details 207 Copy A large 208 Copy A small 209 Local copy Total 1 210 Local copy Total 2 211 Local copy large 212 Local copy small 217 Copy full color 1 218 Copy full color 2 219 Copy mono color 1 220 Copy mono color 2 221 Copy black and white 1 222 Copy black and white 2 223 Copy full color large...

Page 947: ...ge 316 Print full color small 317 Print mono color large 318 Print mono color small No Counter Details 319 Print black and white large 320 Print black and white small 321 Print full color mono color large 322 Print full color mono color small 323 Print full color mono color 2 324 Print full color mono color 1 325 Print full color large double sided 326 Print full color small double sided 327 Print...

Page 948: ... mono color large double sided 624 Box print mono color small double sided 625 Box print black and white large double sided 626 Box print black and white small double sided 631 memory media print Total 1 632 memory media print Total 2 633 memory media print large 634 memory media print small 635 memory media print full color 1 636 memory media print full color 2 639 memory media print black and wh...

Page 949: ...ort print small 805 Report print full color 1 806 Report print full color 2 809 Report print black and white 1 810 Report print black and white 2 811 Report print full color large 812 Report print full color small 815 Report print black and white large 816 Report print black and white small 821 Report print full color large double sided 822 Report print full color small double sided 825 Report pri...

Page 950: ... If MEAP application may be used by other users after the machine is removed disable the MEAP application and uninstall it in advance Performing Initialize All Data Settings does not delete the license of the system option Deletion of Service Mode Settings The user mode setting values may have been changed at the user s request In that case the service mode setting values should be changed back to...

Page 951: ...Name iR ADV XXXX iAXXXX Overwrite Method for Deletion Mode Once with Random Data 1 The following data stored in the device has been completely erased Data stored in the temporary data area User generated data Settings under Settings Registration restored to factory defaults 1 display following one Once with 0 Null Data Once with Random Data 3 Times with Random Data 9 Times with Random Data DoD Sta...

Search results

Summary of Contents for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3325 Series

Reviews:

Related manuals for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3325 Series

Brands by name

Popular brands

Canon imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3325 Series, Service Manual

Search results

Summary of Contents for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3325 Series

Reviews:

Related manuals for imageRUNNER ADVANCE C3325 Series

Brands by name

Popular brands